Garmin | G900X | Garmin G900X G900X Pilot's Guide

Garmin G900X G900X Pilot's Guide
G900X
®
®
G900X Pilot’s Guide
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG)
Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical
Support: 888.606.5482
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District,
New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
www.garmin.com
190-00726-00
Revision L
Integrated Flight Deck
Pilot’s Guide
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2007-2009, 2011, 2012, 2016 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0718.16 or later. Some differences in operation may be observed when
comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913.397.8200
Fax: 913.397.8282
Aircraft On Ground (AOG) Hotline: 913.397.0836
Aviation Dealer Technical Support: 888.606.5482
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503.581.8101
Fax 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Tel: 34-93-357-2608
Fax: 34-93-429-4484
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, G900X®, WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. Garmin
ESP™, Garmin SVT™, and Connext™ are trademarks of Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used
without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Avidyne® and TCAD® are registered trademarks of Avidyne Corporation; S-TEC®
is a registered trademark of S-TEC; CO Guardian is a trademark of CO Guardian, Inc.; AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton
Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc. SiriusXM Weather and
SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
December, 2016
Printed in the U.S.A
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
LIMITED WARRANTY
List all Garmin products and serial numbers and retain this document for your records.
Product
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Serial Number
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
i
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G900X GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G900X PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the G900X system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G900X operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
ii
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The Garmin G900X, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur
without a fault indication shown by the G900X. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an
occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G900X utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G900X can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G900X
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the G900X Integrated Avionics System in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications
from the G900X to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual
sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G900X to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the G900X within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
iii
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
WARNING: Do not use a QFE altimeter setting with this system. System functions will not operate properly
with a QFE altimeter setting. Use only a QNH altimeter setting for height above mean sea level, or the
standard pressure setting, as applicable.
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G900X does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G900X panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G900X system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
iv
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the
following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed
in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their
impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to
coordinate the revised DQRs.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Report An Aviation Data Error Report.’
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
v
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
vi
Part Number
190-00726-00
Revision
A
Date
04/04/07
Page Range
i – I-6
Initial release
190-00726-00
B
11/6/07
i – I-6
Update to GDU 8.10, add three display no-EIS configuration.
190-00726-00
C
01/25/08
i – I-6
Update to GDU 8.20, reformatted to new book format
190-00726-00
D
07/03/08
i – I-6
Update to GDU 9.01 with SVS
190-00726-00
E
07/18/08
i – I-6
Added SVS traffic warning, and added System Software number
on front cover
190-00726-00
F
12/14/09
i – I-6
Update to GDU 10.01
190-00726-00
G
2/4/11
i – I-6
Update to GDU 12.00
190-00726-00
H
1/6/12
i – I-6
Added GFC 7X, added GSR 56, and modified some annunciations
190-00726-00
J
8/10/12
i – I-6
Update to GDU 12.11
190-00726-00
K
1/29/16
i – I-6
Update to GDU 15.10
190-00726-00
L
12/20/16
i – I-6
Updated system software number from 0718.xx to 0718.16.
Updated addresses and telephone numbers.
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
Description
190-00726-00 Rev. L
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Line Replaceable Units............................................ 2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 9
System Power-up.................................................... 10
System Operation................................................... 11
Display Operation........................................................ 11
G900X System Annunciations....................................... 13
System Status.............................................................. 14
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 16
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 17
G900X Controls...................................................... 22
PFD/MFD Controls....................................................... 22
MFD/PFD Control Unit (Optional).................................. 25
MFD Control Unit (Optional.......................................... 27
Softkey Function.......................................................... 29
Accessing G900X Functionality............................ 36
Menus........................................................................ 36
Data Entry.................................................................. 36
Page Groups............................................................... 38
System Settings........................................................... 42
System Utilities............................................................ 51
Electronic Checklists (Optional)..................................... 55
Display Backlighting.............................................. 57
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 62
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 62
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 64
Altimeter.................................................................... 65
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 68
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 69
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 70
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 75
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 83
Outside Air Temperature............................................... 83
Wind Data.................................................................. 84
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 85
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 86
System Alerting........................................................... 86
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 87
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 87
Terrain Annunciations.................................................. 88
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 88
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 89
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 89
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 91
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 91
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 92
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 Piston Aircraft EIS.................................................. 95
Piston Engine Page.................................................... 100
Piston Leaning Assist Mode........................................ 109
Piston EIS Display (Reversionary Mode)....................... 111
3.2 Turboprop Aircraft EIS......................................... 121
Turboprop System Display.......................................... 123
Turboprop Fuel Display............................................... 125
Turboprop EIS Display (Reversionary Mode)................. 128
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview............................................................... 131
PFD Controls and Frequency Display............................ 132
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 134
MFD/PFD Control Unit................................................ 136
MFD Control Unit...................................................... 138
4.2 COM Operation..................................................... 140
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation.................... 140
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 141
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 142
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................. 143
Auto-tuning from the MFD......................................... 144
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 147
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 148
Volume..................................................................... 148
4.3 NAV Operation...................................................... 149
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 149
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 150
Selecting the Radio to be Tuned.................................. 152
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 153
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 156
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 157
DME Tuning.............................................................. 158
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.4 Mode S Transponder(s)........................................ 159
Transponder Controls................................................. 159
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 160
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 162
IDENT Function......................................................... 164
ADS-B TX.................................................................. 165
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 165
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 167
Power-Up.................................................................. 167
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 167
Speaker.................................................................... 167
Intercom................................................................... 167
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 170
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 170
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 171
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 172
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 173
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 173
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 173
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 173
PFD Failure, Dual System............................................ 173
PFD Failure, Single System (Reversionary Mode).......... 174
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction.......................................................... 175
Navigation Status Box................................................ 177
5.2 Using Map Displays.............................................. 179
Map Orientation........................................................ 179
Map Range............................................................... 181
Map Panning............................................................. 183
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 188
Topography............................................................... 189
Map Symbols............................................................ 192
Airways.................................................................... 198
Track Vector.............................................................. 200
Wind Vector.............................................................. 201
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 202
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 203
Field of View (SVT)..................................................... 204
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 205
No-EIS Option........................................................... 206
viii
5.3 Waypoints.............................................................. 212
Airports.................................................................... 213
Intersections............................................................. 220
NDBs........................................................................ 222
VORs........................................................................ 224
VRPs........................................................................ 226
5.4 Airspaces............................................................... 234
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 238
5.6 Flight Planning...................................................... 244
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 245
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 253
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 255
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 258
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 265
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 267
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 270
Parallel Track............................................................. 272
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 275
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 276
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 277
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 279
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 279
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 284
Altitude Constraints................................................... 286
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 290
Departures................................................................ 290
Arrivals .................................................................... 293
Approaches .............................................................. 295
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 303
Trip Planning............................................................. 303
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 307
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 311
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 336
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather................................................. 340
Activating Services..................................................... 340
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 341
6.2 Garmin Connext Weather.................................... 375
Registering the Iridium Satellite System....................... 375
Registering the system for Garmin Connext Weather..... 376
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Connext Weather Data Requests................................. 385
Garmin Connext Weather Products.............................. 389
Abnormal Operations................................................. 404
Traffic Description...................................................... 493
Operation................................................................. 494
System Status............................................................ 502
6.3 FIS-B Weather....................................................... 406
Using FIS-B Weather Products..................................... 406
FIS-B Weather Status................................................. 428
6.4 Lightning Detection System................................ 429
Setting Up Lightning Detection on the Navigation Map.429
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 433
6.5 Terrain Proximity.................................................. 434
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 434
Terrain Proximity Page................................................ 437
6.6 Terrain-SVS............................................................ 439
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 440
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 442
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 444
System Status............................................................ 447
6.7 TAWS-B.................................................................. 448
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 449
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 451
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 453
System Status............................................................ 459
6.8 Profile View Terrain.............................................. 461
Profile View Display................................................... 462
6.9 Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 465
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 466
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 468
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 469
System Status............................................................ 471
6.10 Garmin TAS Traffic................................................ 473
Theory of operation................................................... 473
TAS Alerts................................................................. 477
System Test............................................................... 478
Operation................................................................. 479
System Status........................................................... 486
6.11 Garmin GDL 88 ADS-B Traffic.............................. 487
ADS-B System Overview............................................. 487
ADS-B with TAS......................................................... 489
Conflict Situational Awareness & Alerting.................... 489
Airborne and Surface Applications............................... 492
6.12 Avidyne TAS600 Series Traffic.................................. 505
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 505
Altitude Display......................................................... 507
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 508
TAS Alerts................................................................. 510
System Status............................................................ 511
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 GFC 7X (Lancair Evolution only)......................... 513
7.2 AFCS Controls....................................................... 515
7.3 Flight Director Operation.................................... 517
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 517
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 518
Command Bars.......................................................... 519
Flight Director Modes................................................. 519
7.4 AFCS Modes.......................................................... 520
Vertical Modes (PIT, ALT, VS, FLC)................................. 520
Lateral Modes........................................................... 526
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 526
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 527
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 528
Combination modes (GA, VNV, APR, NAV, BC)............... 530
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation.............. 542
Flight Control............................................................ 542
Engaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper..................... 543
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 543
Disengaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper................. 544
7.6 Example Flight Plan............................................. 545
Departure................................................................. 545
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 547
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 548
Descent.................................................................... 549
Approach.................................................................. 553
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 556
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 558
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 558
Overspeed Protection................................................. 559
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
x
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...................... 562
SVT Operation........................................................... 563
SVT Features............................................................. 565
Field of View............................................................. 574
SafeTaxi................................................................. 576
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 579
ChartView.............................................................. 582
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 583
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 584
Chart Options............................................................ 592
Day/Night View......................................................... 598
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 600
FliteCharts............................................................. 603
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 603
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 604
Chart Options............................................................ 611
Day/Night View......................................................... 615
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 617
Airport Directory.................................................. 620
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.621
Satellite Telephone Services............................... 623
Registering the System............................................... 623
Telephone Communication......................................... 623
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 630
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment............ 641
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 641
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 643
Bluetooth® Management.................................... 647
Scheduler............................................................... 649
Flight Data Logging............................................. 651
Abnormal Operation............................................ 653
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 653
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 653
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 654
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 657
Comparator Annunciations (3 Display Only)................. 661
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations (3 Display Only)..... 662
G900X System Message Advisories............................. 665
ADS-B Status Page Messages...................................... 678
AFCS Alerts............................................................... 679
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 680
Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations..................... 680
TAWS-B ALERTS......................................................... 681
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations.......................... 682
Traffic System Status Alerts......................................... 683
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 685
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 686
Database Management................................................. 687
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 687
Garmin Databases..................................................... 691
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................. 697
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 705
General TIS Information................................................ 709
Map Symbols.................................................................. 711
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GDU 1040/1045 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAU)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
EIS
• GDU 1040/1045 Primary Flight Display(s) (PFD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X Integrated Flight Deck System presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication,
and identification information to the pilot using flat-panel color displays. The system is distributed across the
following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs. Additional/optional equipment are shown in Figure 1-2. The
G900X is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:
• GCU 476 MFD/PFD Control Unit
• GWX 68 Weather Radar
• Artex ELT 406-N Emergency Locator Transmitter
• GTS 800/820 Traffic Advisory System
• S-TEC 55X Autopilot
• GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver
• TruTrak Sorcerer/DFC Series autopilots
• Flight Stream 210 Wireless Bluetooth® Gateway
• TruTrak Digiflight II-Series autopilots
• GDL 88 ADS-B Transceiver
• TruTrak Digitrak/Pictorial Pilot autopilots
• KN 63 DME
• TruTrak ADI
• KR 87 ADF
• Trio Avionics EZ Pilot Autopilot
AFCS
• Avidyne TAS600-series Traffic Advisory System
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDL 69A/69A SXM Data Link Receiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GCU 477 MFD Control Unit
• CO Guardian Aero 353R/452R Remote Carbon
Monoxide Detector
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the (optional, Lancair Evolution only) GFC 7X AFCS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GFC 7X Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), and
yaw damper (YD) functions of the G900X system.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1040/1045 (2 or 3) – In a two display configuration, the left-hand GDU is configured as a Primary Flight
Display (PFD) and the right-hand GDU as a Multi Function Display (MFD). In a three display configuration, the
left and right GDUs are configured as Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) and the middle GDU as a Multi Function
Display (MFD).All feature 10.4-inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with
each other through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an
Ethernet connection to an IAU.
or
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GMA 1347 – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio, intercom,
and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual control of
display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP Button; see Section 1.5, System Operation) and communicates
with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hubs, linking all
LRUs with the on-side display. Each IAU contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, and
system integration microprocessors, and is paired with the on-side display via HSDB connection. The IAUs are
not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
INDEX
• GDC 74A (1 or 2) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information
to the system. It communicates with the primary IAU, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital interface.
2
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GEA 71 – The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This
unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
• GTX 33 (1 or 2) – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability and communicates with
both IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GRS 77 (1 or 2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both PFDs and the primary IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed
in Section 1.4, System Operation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
• GMU 44 (1 or 2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing
to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates
with it via an RS-485 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
• GCU 476 or GCU 477 – (optional) The GCU 476 provides MFD/PFD and radio tuning control through an
RS-232 digital interface. The GCU 477 provides MFD and radio tuning control through an RS-232 digital
interface
or
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDL 69A/69A SXM – (optional) The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information
to the G900X MFD and PFD Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The Data Link Receiver
communicates with the MFD via a HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite Radio Service is required
to enable the GDL 69A capability.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• GWX 68 (1) – (optional) Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD, through the
GDL 69A, via HSDB connection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GTS 800/820 (1) – The optional GTS 800/820 provides real-time traffic information to the MFD (and, indirectly,
to the inset map of the PFD). The GTS 800/820 communicates with the MFD with an HSDB connection.
AFCS
• GSR 56 (1 optional) The Iridium Transceiver provides voice communication by means of pilot and copilot
headsets. The unit can also send and receive data over the Iridium satellite network. The GSR 56 is connected
to the #1 GIA 63W with an RS-232 digital interface.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GDL 88/88D (1 optional) – Provides ADS-B Traffic in and FIS-B Weather.
INDEX
• Flight Stream 210 (1 optional) – Provides wireless Bluetooth connectivity between a compatible tablet/mobile
device and the avionics system.
4
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
GDU 1040
GMA 1347
Audio Panel
Primary Flight Display
Multi Function Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reversionary
Control
Reversionary
Control
EIS
G
GDC
74A
A
Air Data
C
Computerr
System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GRS 77
AHRS
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS Output
No. 2 GIA 63W
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Ve
ed
No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
GPS Output
GMU 44
Magnetometer
Heading
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GTX 33
Transponder
AFCS
GEA 71
Engine/Airframe
Unit
Figure 1-1 Basic G900X Two Display System Block Diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
GDU 1040
GMA 1347
GDU 1040
MFD
Audio Panel
PFD #2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD #1
EIS
GCU 476
Control Unit
(optional, shown)
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GCU 477
Control Unit
(optional)
GIA 63W #1
Integrated Avionics Unit
GDC 74A #1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GPS Output
GDC 74A #2
Air Data
Computer
Air Data
Computer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
ed
GRS 77 #1
AHRS
GRS 77 #2
AHRS
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
GMU 44 #1
AFCS
GIA 63W #2
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GPS Output
GMU 44 #2
Magnetometer
Magnetometer
Heading
Heading
GTX 33 #1
GTX 33 #2
Transponder
Transponder
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GEA 71
APPENDICES
Engine/
Airframe Unit
INDEX
Figure 1-2 Basic G900X Three Display System Block Diagram
6
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
GCU 476
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
Control Unit
(optional, shown)
or
No. 2 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
GCU 477
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
Control Unit
(optional)
Provides Traffic
Information
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
CO Guardian
Carbon Monoxide
Detection
(optional)
GTS 800/820
Traffic Advisory System
(optional)
Flight Stream 210
Bluetooth Gateway
AFCS
(optional)
(optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Honeywell
KR 87 ADF
GDL 88
GWX 68
Weather Radar
Autopilot
(optional)
Honeywell
KN 63 DME
ADS-B Transceiver
Data Link
Real-time Weather and
Digital Audio Entertainment
(optional,
subscription-based service)
STEC/
TruTrak/
Trio
GSR 56
Iridium Transceiver
GDL 69A/69A SXM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Avidyne
TAS600-series
ELT
Emergency Locator
Transmitter
(optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No. 1 GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Unit
(optional)
Figure 1-3 G900X Two Display With Optional/Additional Equipment
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: For information on non-Garmin optional/additional equipment shown in Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4,
APPENDICES
consult the applicable optional interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already
familiar with the operation of this additional equipment.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GDU 1040
GDU 1040
GMA 1347
GDU 1040
MFD
Audio Panel
PFD #2
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD #1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GIA 63W #1
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
ELT
Emergency Locator
Transmitter
(optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W #2
Integrated Avionics Unit
GSR 56
Iridium Transceiver
(optional)
GDL 69A
Data Link
Real-time Weather and
Digital Audio Entertainment
(optional,
subscription-based service)
Avidyne
TAS600
Honeywell
KN 63 DME
Traffic
Advisory System
(optional)
GWX 68
Weather Radar
(optional)
(optional)
STEC/
TruTrak/
Trio
Autopilot
Honeywell
KR 87 ADF
(optional)
GTS 800/820
Traffic Advisory System
(optional)
AFCS
(optional)
GDL 88
Flight Stream 210
(optional)
(optional)
ADS-B Transceiver
Bluetooth Gateway
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-4 G900X Three Display With Optional/Additional Equipment
8
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.2 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Ensure the G900X System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database.
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SD Card Slots
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-3 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SYSTEM POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD(s), MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test
features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-4. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel, the Control Unit, and the display bezels.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the PFD(s), the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS
should display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align
itself both while taxiing in a straight line and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-5), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• System version
• Copyright
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database name and effective dates
• Terrain database name and version
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and effective dates
• Navigation database name and effective dates
• Airport Directory name and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the ENT Key (or right-most softkey) acknowledges this information, and the Navigation Map Page is
displayed upon pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization
10
Figure 1-5 Example MFD Power-up Screen
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for detailed descriptions of all annunciations and alerts. The G900X System alerts
the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. The kitplane builder should establish appropriate pilot
actions in response to all G900X annunciations in the aircraft-specific Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This section discusses normal and reversionary G900X
display operation, AHRS modes, GPS receiver operation, and G900X System Annunciations.
EIS
DISPLAY OPERATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD(s) (see Section 1.7). In
reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display(s).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In normal operating mode, the PFD(s) presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
or to Navigation Information (EIS, see the EIS Section; Navigation Information, see the Flight Management
Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-6 G900X Two Display System Normal Operation
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 1-7 G900X Three Display System Normal Operation
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
In the event of a display failure, the G900X System automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display(s) in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD1 failure – MFD enters reversionary mode; PFD2 remains in normal mode.
• MFD failure – PFD1 and PFD2 enter reversionary mode.
• PFD2 failure – PFD1 and the MFD remain in normal mode.
EIS
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the system fails to detect a display problem, reversionary mode may be manually activated by pressing the
Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid
AFCS
DISPLAY BACKUP Button Manually Activates/
Deactivates Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
Figure 1-8 G900X Two Display Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)
INDEX
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
Figure 1-9 G900X Three Display Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD1)
12
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
G900X SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
EIS
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GRS 77 AHRS
or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
Figure 1-10 G900X System Failure Annunciations
GTX 33 Transponder
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-10 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G900X power-up, certain
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the G900X should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized
repair facility.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted
and a service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the DATABASE window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label to PFD2
DB (only if three tube system, otherwise will go to MFD1 DB again). PFD 2 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ANN TEST Softkey, when pressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
Figure 1-11 Example System Status Page
INDEX
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page. Refer to the Appendices and
Additional Features sections for more information about databases.
14
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing database information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Database’ Box,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the DB Softkey (repeat until desired database is shown; MFD1, PFD1, or PFD2).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Dbase Window’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information.
The G900X uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe-specific alerts. The alerting system’s annunciation
tone may be tested from the System Status Page. Refer to the Appendices for airframe-specific alerts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
EIS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and
air data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the GRS 77 AHRS relies upon GPS and
magnetic field measurements (air data is not used). If one or more of these three external inputs is unavailable
or unreliable, the AHRS uses the remaining inputs for attitude/heading determination. Four AHRS modes of
operation are available (Figure 1-13) and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air
data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The AHRS (GRS 77) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic
Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field
and its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5 years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
YES
NO
Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
Mag Data Available and Reliable?
NO
YES
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
AHRS Normal
Mode
NO
YES
Air Data Available and Reliable?
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Heading Invalid
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
Attitude/Heading Invalid
INDEX
Figure 1-12 AHRS Operation
16
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AHRS FAILURE
Failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors may result in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated
by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS INPUT FAILURE
EIS
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information
provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS continues to operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs
are available and reliable. Unavailable or unreliable air data or magnetometer data in addition to GPS failure
results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes
and continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output
on the PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
A failure of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
AFCS
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
GPS1 provides information to the pilot-side PFD and GPS2 provides data to the copilot-side PFD. Internal
system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFDs. In some
circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing a better
GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better solution is automatically
coupled to both PFDs. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” is displayed in the Reversionary Sensor
Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS receivers are still functioning
properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that particular time.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).
EIS
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - GPS Status Page.
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS
Selected
APPENDICES
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
GPS Selection
Softkeys
RAIM Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Figure 1-22 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
18
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
SBAS
Softkey
Selected
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Satellite constellation diagram
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite signal information status
EIS
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
• GPS receiver status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
AFCS
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is selected)
APPENDICES
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint
EIS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, select the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key.
Refer to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G1000.
Or:
a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, or AIRWAY waypoints, if required.
c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The G1000 automatically fills in the
identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
AFCS
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
APPENDICES
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, select the RAIM Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
20
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
EIS
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is selected)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desireable to disable SBAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS
Status box indicates DISABLED.
Disabling SBAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘EGNOS’ or ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’, as necessary.
5) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
6) Repeat steps 4 & 5 as necessary, then press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for SBAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
APPENDICES
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite can be used as part of the differential computations
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 G900X CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the
time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, Control
Unit, and Audio Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. Audio Panel controls
are described in the Audio Panel and CNS section; see the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information
about NAV/COM controls.
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2
5
4
3
6
7
8
9
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
18
17
19
25
10
13
20
26
11
14
21
27
12
15
22
28
23
29
24
30
16
GDU 1045 Only
INDEX
Figure 1-15 PFD/MFD Controls
22
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a percentage)
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
2 NAV Frequency
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1 NAV VOL/ID Knob
Turn to manually select a heading
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize the
Selected Heading to the and current heading
5 Joystick
Turn to change map range
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
6 CRS/BARO Knob
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active waypoint/
station
7 COM Knob
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4 Heading Knob
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
EIS
3 NAV Knob
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transfer Key
8 COM Frequency
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
Transfer Key (EMERG) Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the
active frequency field
10 Direct-to Key (
Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM Frequency Box)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF
)
Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and
establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route)
Displays flight plan information
12 CLR Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
(DFLT MAP)
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
15 ENT Key
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry
16 FMS Knob
Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large knob moves
cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor location)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar appears,
indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a page
group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
(Flight Management
System Knob)
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
14 PROC Key
APPENDICES
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
13 MENU Key
AFCS
11 FPL Key
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9 COM VOL/SQ Knob
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
17 Softkey Selection
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
Keys
AP Key
20
FD Key
21
NAV Key
Activates/deactivates the Flight Director only. Pressing the FD key turns on the Flight Director
in the default vertical and lateral modes. Pressing the FD key again deactivates the Flight
Director and removes the command bars, unless the Autopilot is engaged. If the Autopilot is
engaged, the FD key is disabled.
Selects/deselects the Navigation mode.
22
ALT Key
Selects/deselects the Altitude Hold mode.
23
VS Key
Selects/deselects the Vertical Speed mode.
24
FLC Key
Selects/deselects the Flight Level Change mode.
25
YD Key
Engages/disengages the Yaw Damper.
26
HDG Key
Selects/deselects the Heading Select mode.
27
APR Key
Selects/deselects the Approach mode.
28
Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode
29
VNV Key
(if equipped)
NOSE UP Key
30
NOSE DN Key
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
19
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the thousands, the
small knob selects the hundreds)
Engages/disengages the Autopilot and Flight Director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18 ALT Knob
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes.
Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Large (Outer) Knob
APPENDICES
AFCS
The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner)
and large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.
Figure 1-16 Dual Concentric Knob
INDEX
Small (Inner) Knob
24
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD/PFD CONTROL UNIT (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional MFD/PFD Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted user interface allowing for ease of data entry,
MFD/PFD operation, and NAV/COM tuning. Many procedures in this Pilot’s Guide can be performed using
the MFD/PFD Control Unit rather than the display bezel controls. Indicators above the PFD, MFD, NAV, and
COM keys are illuminated when their respective control mode(s) are selected. The unit is in MFD control mode
by default on system power-up.
1
2
3
EIS
NAV/COM radio tuning can be accomplished in either PFD or MFD control mode. The appropriate frequency
box on the selected display is outlined by a cyan selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate
Control Unit activity (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about NAV/COM tuning).
Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation of the previous radio tuning
mode.
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
19
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
17
16
15
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
14
7
12
8
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
AFCS
13
9
Figure 1-17 GCU 476 MFD/PFD Control Unit (Optional)
2 Direct-to Key (
APPENDICES
1 FPL Key
Displays flight plan information
)
Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and
establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier, chosen from the
active route)
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
25
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making setting
changes
4 PROC Key
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
5 Joystick
Turn to change map range
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
6 Alphanumeric Keys
Allow data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/numbers)
7 BKSP Key
Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered
8 SPC Key
Adds a space character
9 ENT Key
Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10 CLR Key
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
11 SEL Key
Arrows move cyan Softkey Selection Box (Figure 1-14) on selected display
Press the center to activate the selected softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
12 Decimal Key
Enters a decimal point character
13 Plus-Minus (±) Key
Toggles entry between the + and - characters
14 NAV Key
Selects/deselects NAV radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit
15 COM Key
Selects/deselects COM radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit
16 Frequency Transfer
Transfers between active and standby selected COM or NAV tuning frequencies
Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the
active frequency field
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3 MENU Key
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
17 PFD Key
When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit can be used to access PFD functions
18 MFD Key
When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit can be used to access MFD functions (default display
control mode)
19 FMS/NAV-COM Knob
NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob
PFD/MFD Control Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Key
(EMERG)
26
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD CONTROL UNIT (OPTIONAL
Many of the controls on the Control Unit (GCU 477) have the same function as those located on the MFD.
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the Control Unit (see Figure 1-18):
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
10
11
12
EIS
13
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
15
16
20
19
18
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
21
17
Figure 1-18 Control Unit (GCU 477)
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and holding this key
displays the Navigation Map Page automatically.
4
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
5
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
6
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
7
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3
APPENDICES
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
AFCS
Alphabetic Keys – Allow the user to enter letters quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
27
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. When the FMS Key is pressed, this knob selects the
MFD page to be viewed. The large knob selects a page group (MAP, WPT, AUX, NRST), while the small
knob selects a specific page within the page group. Pressing the FMS Knob turns the selection cursor ON
and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. In this case, the large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location. This knob also tuning capability for the COM
and NAV radios when the appropriate COM or NAV key is presssed. When the XPDR Key is pressed, the
transponder code may be entered using the FMS Knob.
10
FMS Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control FMS functions on the MFD. When pressed, an annunciator next
to the key illuminates indicating adjustment of the FMS Knob will now affect FMS functions.
11
Numeric Keys – Allow the user to enter numbers quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob.
12
COM Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the COM radios. The first press will select COM1,
as indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select COM2. This is annunciated
with a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the COM Key will switch between COM1 and
COM2. Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected COM.
13
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Switches the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the
active frequency field.
14
NAV Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the NAV radios. The first press will select NAV1, as
indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select NAV2. This is annunciated with
a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the NAV Key will switch between NAV1 and NAV2.
Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected NAV.
15
XPDR Key – Sets the FMS Knob to enter transponders codes. When pressed, an annunciator next to the
key illuminates indicating the FMS Knob can now be used for transponder code entry.
16
IDENT Key – Activates transponder IDENT function.
17
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key – Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
18
SEL Key – The center of this key activates the selected MFD softkey, while the right and left arrows move
the softkey selection box to the right and left, respectively.
19
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
20
BKSP Key – Moves the cursor back one character space.
21
SPC Key – Adds a space character.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8
AFCS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
28
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is pressed, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
Softkey Selection Box
(using Control Unit)
Softkey
On
EIS
Softkey
Names
(Displayed)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-19 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
The Control Unit can also be used to select softkeys.
Selecting a softkey using the Control Unit:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Choose the desired display control mode by pressing the PFD or MFD Key on the Control Unit (GCU 476 only).
2) Move the Softkey Selection Box (the cyan outline around the softkey label) to the desired softkey using the
arrows of the SEL Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the center of the SEL Key to select the desired softkey.
PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
SENSOR
(optional)
PFD
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
DL LTNG
(optional)
or
XM LTNG METAR
BACK
ALERTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(optional)
INSET
AFCS
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be pressed to return to the
previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
APPENDICES
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
Figure 1-20 Top Level PFD Softkeys
INSET
(optional)
190-00726-00 Rev. L
DCLTR
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
WX LGND
TOPO
TRFC-1
TRFC-2
NEXRAD
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
(US/RGNL only
US
(optional)
INDEX
OFF
PRECIP
or
NEXRAD
(optional)
or
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
INSET
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
OFF
DCLTR (3)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
WX LGND
TRAFFIC
Displays icon and age on the Inset Map for the selected weather products
Displays traffic information on Inset Map
TRAFFIC: No Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on Inset Map
TRFC-2: Traffic Only display shown
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale
on Inset Map
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
Displays Stormscope information on Inset Map (optional)
Displays SiriusXM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Inset Map (optional)
TOPO
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERRAIN
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
or
NEXRAD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
or
PRECIP
(optional)
INSET
SENSOR
AFCS
XM LTNG
or
DL LTNG
METAR
When the GDL 88 is installed and FIS-B is the selected weather source, softkey cycles
through NEXRAD weather and additional coverage options on Inset Map (optional):
US: Continental US NEXRAD weather displayed on Inset Map
RGNL: Regional NEXRAD weather displayed on Inset Map
(optional)
Displays/removes Garmin Connext
radar precipitation and radar coverage information
PFD
OBS
CDI
XPDR
IDENT TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
DME
on Inset Map (optional)
Displays SiriusXM lightning on Navigation Map (optional GDL 69/69A/69 SXM/
69A SXM only) Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
Displays Connext Weather
- GPSlightning on Navigation Map (optional GSR 56 only)
- NAV1on(VOR/LOC)
Displays METAR information
Inset Map (optional)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INSET
APPENDICES
(optional)
INDEX
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND
TOPO
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
DCLTR-3
PFD
30
PRECIP
or
NEXRAD
(optional)
or
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD
NEXRAD
(US/RGNL only
avail with
FIS-B weather)
(optional)
DL LTNG
(optional)
or
XM LTNG METAR
BACK
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
US
RGNL
Figure 1-21 INSET Softkeys
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(optional)
SENSOR
PFD
OBS
CDI
(optional)
DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displays softkeys for selecting the #1 and #2 AHRS and Air Data Computers (optional)
Selects the #1 Air Data Computer
Selects the #2 Air Data Computer
Selects the #1 AHRS
Selects the #2 AHRS
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
INSET
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SENSOR
ALERTS
EIS
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top level softkeys.
ALERTS
Figure 1-22 SENSOR Softkeys
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
INDEX
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HSI FRMT
360 HSI
ARC HSI
AFCS
DFLTS
WIND
OPTN1
OPTN2
OPTN3
OFF
DME
BRG1
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current
aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
Wind direction arrow with numeric speed
Wind direction arrow with numeric headwind/tailwind and crosswind speed
Removes wind information from display
Displays/removes the DME Information Window (optional)
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and distance information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
OFF: Removes window
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information windows unavailable)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD
31
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
BRG2INSET
ALT UNIT
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND
METERS
DCLTR-1
EIS
IN
DCLTR-2
HPA
STD DCLTR-3
BARO
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and distance information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
(optional)
OFF: Removes windowPRECIP (optional)
or
NEXRAD DL LTNG
Displays softkeys for changing
(optional) theorAltimeter
(optional)setting and altitude displays
or barometric
ALERTS
TOPO units
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR
BACK
to metric
Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when
selected
Press the BACK Softkey to return
NEXRAD
TRFC-1
the top-level softkeys.
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in toinches
of mercury (in Hg)
US
(US/RGNL only
TRFC-2
Displays the Altimeter
barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
avail with
FIS-B
weather)
RGNL
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92
in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD
(optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(optional)
SYN VIS
DFLTS
WIND
DME
BRG1
HSI FMT
BRG2
ALT UNIT STD BARO
BACK
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
softkeys to display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
the Bearing Information
windows and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
AFCS
360 HSI
ARC HSI
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
METERS
OPTN1
OPTN2
OPTN3
IN
HPA
OFF
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
APPENDICES
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
ALERTS
Figure 1-23 PFD ConfigurationXPDR
Softkeys
INDEX
STBY
ON
ALT
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
32
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Garmin
G900X
Pilot’s
Guide
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
190-00726-00 Rev. L
avail with
FIS-B weather)
DCLTR-3
RGNL
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD
(optional)
SYN VIS
WIND
DFLTS
XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
SYN TERR HRZN HDG
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TMR/REF
NRST
PATHWAY
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OPTN1
EIS
VFR
CODE
0—7
BKSP
IDENT
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active
leg)
(optional)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation sources on the HSI
DME
BRG2
HSI FMT
ALERTS
BACK
BRG1
ALT UNIT STD BARO
Displays the DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the DME
(optional)
Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
Displays transponder
modetoselection
softkeys:to the top-level softkeys.
softkeys
display/remove
the Bearing
Information
Selects standby mode
(Transponder
does not reply to any interrogations)
windows and cycle through
bearing sources:
Selects Mode A (Transponder
replies to interrogations)
- NAV1/NAV2
Selects Mode C – altitude
reporting mode (Transponder replies to identification and
- GPS
altitude interrogations)
360 HSI ARC HSI
BACK
ALERTS
Automatically enters
the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to
enter code
METERS
IN
HPA
BACK
ALERTS
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder
BACK
ALERTS
OPTN2
OPTN3 return
OFF on the ATC screen
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
ALERTS
APTSIGNS
Displays/removes Alerts Window
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI
DME
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS
XPDR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STBY
ON
ALT
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
AFCS
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
0
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-24 XPDR Softkeys
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS, Navigation Map Page (default MFD page), and
Checklist Page softkeys are described here.
(AUTO or DEST
for No-EIS Config)
ENGINE
DCLTR SHW CHRT CHKLIST
MAP
DCLTR
EIS
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(optional)
PROFILE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN
PRECIP
or
NEXRAD
(optional)
or
AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD
AIRWAYS
NEXRAD
AIRWY ON
US
AIRWY LO
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(EIS config only)
This is an example of
the ENGINE softkeys. See
the EIS section for details.
ENGINE
RGNL
DCLTR-3
(optional)
DL LTNG
or
XM LTNG
(optional) (optional)
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
(US/RGNL only
avail with
FIS-B weather)
AIRWY HI
(optional)
DCLTR
ASSIST
CO RST
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
AFCS
Press the ENGINE softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys (EIS config only).
(AUTO or DEST
for No-EIS Config)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ENGINE
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is already checked.
APPENDICES
Figure 1-25 MFD Softkeys (EIS, Navigation Map Page, and Checklist)
INDEX
ENGINE
(EIS config only)
DCLTR
ASSIST
CO RST
DEC FUEL
34
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; select again to exit
page (see the EIS Section for more information)
Turns off CHT and EGT cylinder readouts
Accesses engine leaning assist mode
Resets CO Guardian; softkey enabled when carbon monoxide alert generated
(optional)
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts
Displays the Checklist Page
Selects the highlighted checklist item
Returns to the top-level softkeys
Immediately accesses the emergency procedures
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
APPENDICES
SHW CHRT
CHKLIST
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
DCLTR (3)
AFCS
XM LTNG
or
DL LTNG
When the GDL 88 is installed and FIS-B is the selected weather source, softkey cycles
through NEXRAD weather and additional coverage options on Inset Map (optional):
US: Continental US NEXRAD weather displayed on Inset Map
RGNL: Regional NEXRAD weather displayed on Inset Map
Displays/removes Garmin Connext radar precipitation and radar coverage information
on Inset Map (optional)
Displays SiriusXM lightning on Navigation Map (optional GDL 69/69A/69 SXM/
69A SXM only)
Displays Connext Weather lightning on Navigation Map (optional GSR 56 only)
Displays/removes Graphical METARs on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays/removes METAR legend on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PRECIP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
or
NEXRAD
EIS
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used
to zero
Switches between AUTO and DEST mode for the Navigation Information display (see
the Flight Management section for more information)
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on
Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:
AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed
AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jetways) displayed
AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
Displays/removes Stormscope information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays SiriusXM NEXRAD weather and coverage on Inset Map (optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTO or DEST
(No-EIS config only)
MAP
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 ACCESSING G900X FUNCTIONALITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MENUS
EIS
The G900X has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’
when there are no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all
window/page group operations are described in Section 1.5, G900X Controls.
Navigating a menu:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for FPL Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options for
NRST Window
Figure 1-26 Page Menu Examples
AFCS
DATA ENTRY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Two methods exist for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers, barometric
minimum descent altitude) into the G900X: using the using the alphanumeric keypad (on the Control Unit) or
the FMS Knob corresponding to the display (PFD, MFD, or Control Unit).
INDEX
APPENDICES
In some instances, such as when entering an identifier, the G900X tries to predict the desired identifier based
on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the
entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the characters
of the identifier.
36
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, turning the small FMS Knob counterclockwise accesses five different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: flight plan (FPL), nearest
(NRST), recently-entered (RECENT), user (USER), and airway (AIRWAY)(AIRWAY available when active leg is
part of an airway). The G900X automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information
for the selected waypoint.
Using the Control Unit keypad to enter data:
1) Choose the desired display control mode by pressing the PFD or MFD Key on the Control Unit (GCU 476 only).
EIS
2) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
4) Use the alphanumeric keys to enter the desired information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry
6) Press the CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field revers back to its previous information).
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) To quickly enter a waypoint identifier, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of
waypoints in the active flight plan (list is titled FPL). If desired, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to scroll
through lists of nearest waypoints (NRST) and recently-entered waypoints (RECENT).
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
AFCS
a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
Turning the knob clockwise scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting at
K, and the digits zero through nine. Afterwards, turning the knob counter-clockwise scrolls in the opposite
direction.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
c) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until
the field is complete.
APPENDICES
d) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE GROUPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs. The
current page group and current page within the group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/
Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page
name in the list remains the same.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Page Group
Active Page Title
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pages in
Current
Group
Page Groups
Figure 1-27 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.There are also several pages
(Airport Information and XM Information pages) which are selected first from within a main page group with
the FMS Knobs, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In this case, the page remains set
to the selected screen until a different screen softkey is pressed.
38
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map (TAS optional)
Weather Radar (optional)
Lightning (XM Lightning (optional)/
DL Lightning (optional))
Weather Data Link (optional)
EIS
Terrain (Terrain SVT (optional)/
TAWS (optional))
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-28 Map Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory Information
(INFO-2 Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
AFCS
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
VOR Information
APPENDICES
NDB Information
Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages
VRP Information
User Waypoint Information
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 1-29 Waypoint Pages
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
XM Satellite pages (optional)
EIS
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Phone Pages (optional)
- Telephone
(TEL Softkey)
- SMS
(SMS Softkey)
XM
Pages
Satellite
Phone
Pages
System Status
Bluetooth Management
Figure 1-30 Auxiliary Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
AFCS
Nearest VOR
Nearest VRP
Nearest User Waypoints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Frequencies
APPENDICES
Nearest Airspaces
INDEX
Figure 1-31 Nearest Pages
40
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
Flight Plan Catalog
EIS
- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-32 Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.
Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)
AFCS
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-33 Procedure Loading Pages
INDEX
Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM SETTINGS
The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Date/time
• Displayed navigation angle reference, temperature,
and position settings
• Baro transition alert
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• COM channel spacing
(see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Airspace alerts
(see the Flight Management Section)
EIS
• MFD Navigation Status Box fields
(see the Flight Management Section)
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see the Flight Management Section)
• Arrival alerts
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio alerts
APPENDICES
Figure 1-34 System Setup Page
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
INDEX
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
Or:
42
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PILOT PROFILES
EIS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen (Figure 1-5). The G900X can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
Creating a profile:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
AFCS
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
Selecting an active profile:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G900X loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If an SD card is inserted into the top slot of the MFD, pilot profiles may imported from the SD card into the
system, or exported from the system to the SD card.
Because system settings may vary from one airframe to another, always verify system settings from an
imported profile are consistent with the desired settings.
AFCS
Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the IMPORT Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) The system displays the Pilot Profile Importing window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
profile file name, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) If desired, the profile name to be used after profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘PROFILE NAME’ field, then use the large and small FMS Knobs to enter the name, and
press the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.
44
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Pilot Profile Importing window.
8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS window below. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
The imported profile becomes the active profile.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pilot Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Import Successful
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-35 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Pilot Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active Pilot Profile can be exported.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the Pilot Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) To export the pilot profile using the current supplied name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To
change the profile file name turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT FILE’ field, then enter the new
name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’
highlighted.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card
with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to
the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pilot Profile Exporting Window, Enter a
Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
Figure 1-36 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DATE/TIME
AFCS
The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD(s). Time and date format (local 12-hr,
local 24-hr, or UTC) are modified on the System Setup Page. Universal Coordinated Time (UTC; also called
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals
and cannot be changed. An offset is provided to add or subtract the desired amount of time (hours:minutes)
from UTC to define current local time.
Configuring the system time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted (for local time formats).
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
46
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G900X screens can be changed on the System Setup
Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing a display units setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ box.
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit*
Gallons***
All temperatures on PFD(s)
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Position
Pounds*
N/A
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
APPENDICES
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Weight
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Feet*
Meters
AFCS
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Metric
Nautical**
Exceptions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Distance and
Speed
Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Category
Settings
Navigation Angle Magnetic*
True
User
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired
unit is highlighted.
N/A
INDEX
* Default setting
** Contact a Garmin-authorized service center to change this setting
*** Not configurable
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Status Page)
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIRSPACE ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alert feature provides a message alert when the aircraft is approaching or near a controlled or
special-use airspace. The altitude buffer setting increases the range above or below an airspace for which an
alert is generated; the default value is 200 feet. Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off from
the System Setup Page:
• Class B/TMA
• Class D
• MOA (Military)
• Class C/TCA
• Restricted
• Other airspaces
EIS
Turning Airspace Alerts off does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace
boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
ARRIVAL ALERTS
AFCS
Arrival alerts provide notification upon reaching a specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to
waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan). Once this trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached,
the Navigation Status Box on the PFD(s) display(s) an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message.
Enabling/disabling arrival alerting and changing the trigger distance:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
INDEX
6) Enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
48
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO ALERTS
The gender of the voice used to announce audio alerts may be set to male or female on the System Setup
Page. See the Appendices for voice alerts.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired voice and press the ENT Key.
MFD DATA BAR FIELDS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
By default, the Navigation Status Box on the MFD is set to display ground speed (GS), distance to next
waypoint (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), and enroute safe altitude (ESA). See the FMS section for more
details on other information that can be displayed.
GPS CDI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the scale for the Course Deviation
Indicator (CDI) when GPS is the selected navigation source and also displays the current system value for the
CDI scale. The range values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is
‘Auto’ (refer to the CDI description in the Flight Instruments Section for information on CDI scaling).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher scale settings are not selected during
any phase of flight. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow
the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phase.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm, Auto) and press the ENT Key.
COM CONFIGURATION
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
APPENDICES
Changing COM channel spacing:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
NEAREST AIRPORTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“any” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (any, hard only, hard/soft, water) and press the
ENT Key.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CDI/BARO SYNCHRONIZATION
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on synchronizing both PFD’s Course Deviation Indicators
and the altimeter barometric settings.
50
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM UTILITIES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset. A scheduler feature is also provided so the pilot can enter reminder
messages to be displayed at specified intervals in the Alerts Window on the PFD(s) (see Figure 1-38).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-38 Utility Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TIMERS
APPENDICES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
EIS
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
The G900X records the time at which departure occurs, measured from system power-up or aircraft lift off.
The displayed departure time can also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in
which the time is displayed is controlled from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
52
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EIS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SCHEDULER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”, “Switch
fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”). Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the
message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches
zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once
the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and message timer
countdown is restarted.
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
APPENDICES
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD(s) and cause the ALERTS Softkey label
to change to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges
the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message list.
PFD
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-39 PFD Alerts Window
54
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: The checklists presented in this section are for example only and may not reflect checklists actually
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
available. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist information
described in the aircraft-specific Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of the checklists. User-defined checklists are created
by the kitplane builder. Download the Garmin G900X Checklist Editor program from myGarmin.com for
information on how to create and upload checklists.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The G900X accesses the checklists from an SD card
inserted into the bezel slot (see Figure 1-3). If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the
Power-up Screen displays ‘Invalid Checklist File’ or ‘Checklist File Not Present’ and the CHKLIST Softkey is
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-40 Checklist Page Example
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page, press the CHKLIST Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the checklist and highlight the desired checklist item (has a hollow white
box for checkmark).
The following colors are used for checklist items:
• Cyan - Items has not been highlighted
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• White - Item is highlighted for selection
• Green - Item has been selected
• Amber - Warning notes
7) Press the ENT Key or DONE Softkey to select the highlighted checklist item (item turns green and a checkmark
is placed in the box next to the item). The next item is automatically highlighted for selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Once the last item in a checklist is selected, ‘Go to the next checklist?’ is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to
advance to the next checklist displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the CLR Key to remove a check mark from an item.
Immediately accessing emergency procedures:
9) Press the EXIT Softkey or hold down the CLR Key momentarily to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page
last viewed.
1) From any page, press the CHKLIST Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the EMERGCY Softkey.
Figure 1-41 Sample Checklist
56
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Backlighting of the PFD(s) and MFD, Audio Panel keys, and Control Unit keys can be adjusted automatically
or manually. The automatic setting (default) uses photocells to adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell
calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting
conditions. In normal display mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD(s). In Reversionary Mode,
it can be adjusted from the remaining display(s).
Adjusting display backlighting manually:
EIS
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’. No
other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the MENU Key
while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
5) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting key backlighting manually:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
9) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
PFD
Figure 1-42 PFD Setup Menu
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
57
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Blank Page
58
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer
to the backup instruments if installed.
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easyto-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
EIS
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– Airspeed awareness ranges
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Generic timer
– Trend vector
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
showing
– Vspeed values and flags
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• Altimeter, showing
– Barometric setting
– Selected Altitude
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Barometric minimum descent
altitude (MDA; or decision
height, DH)
– Navigation source
• System time
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
• Wind data
• Vertical Navigation indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Trend vector
– Heading and course indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Reference flags
• Timer/References Window,
showing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
– True airspeed
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
– Bearing pointers and
information windows
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
AFCS
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
21
20
19
18
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
17
16
2
15
EIS
14
3
13
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
12
5
11
6
10
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
NAV Frequency Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Altimeter Barometric Setting
3
Ground Speed
14
Selected Altitude Bug
4
True Airspeed
15
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
5
Current Heading
16
Altimeter
6
Selected Heading Bug
17
Selected Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
10
Transponder Data Box
21
Attitude Indicator
11
Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
60
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
14
13
1
12
EIS
11
10
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9
2
8
3
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
4
6
Annunciation Window
2
Selected Heading
9
Selected Course
3
Wind Data
10
Vertical Speed Required
4
Inset Map
11
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
5
Bearing Information Windows
12
Marker Beacon Annunciation
6
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
13
Current VNV Target Altitude
7
Flight Plan Window
14
Terrain Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8
AFCS
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the documentation provided by the kitplane manufacturer for airspeed criteria and Vspeed
values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The true airspeed
(TAS) is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The ground speed is displayed to the left of the TAS.
The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots, while minor
tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots and the
actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never-exceed
speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
Vspeed
References
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Actual
Airspeed
Color-coded
Speed
Ranges
Ground
Speed
Figure 2-4 Red Pointer
Showing Overspeed
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A color-coded (red, white, green, yellow, and red/white ‘barber pole”) speed range strip is located on the
moving tape. The colors denote flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed
speed (VNE). A red range is also present for low speed awareness.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed
range strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to
the tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate
of acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the
line shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses
VNE, the text of the actual airspeed readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
62
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vspeeds can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/References Window (Figure 2-5).
When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale.
Changing Vspeeds and turning flags on/off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-6 Timer/References Menu
Figure 2-5 Timer/References Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning all Vspeed flags ON/OFF:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) To view all Vspeed flags, highlight ‘All References On’ and press the ENT Key (Figure 2-6).
4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘All References Off’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch (indicated by the yellow symbolic aircraft on the pitch scale), roll, and
slip/skid information.
9
8
1
EIS
7
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-7 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. If the optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up
and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SVS.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration Slip/skid is indicated by the location of
the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-8 Slip/Skid Indication
64
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling number gauge using a
moving tape. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at
intervals of 20 feet. The indicated altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. The metric value, when selected, is displayed in a
separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude (large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100-ft
increments. When the altimeter is set to display Metric Units, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in
500-meter increments; turn the small knob for 50-meter increments.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Selected
Altitude
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Indicated
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude Bug
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Figure 2-9 Altimeter
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Barometric
Setting
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-10 Altimeter (Metric Units)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Selected and current altitudes can also be displayed in meters (readouts displayed above the normal readouts
in feet; Figure 2-10). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft
to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box.
AFCS
Figure 2-11 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-10).
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the BACK Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
66
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In aircraft equipped with 3 displays, if the barometric altimeter settings differ between PFDs by more than
0.02 in Hg, the readouts turn yellow. Once the settings are synchronized (BARO turned on), they remain
synchronized until the setting is turned off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Synchronizing the altimeter barometric pressure settings (3 Display System Only):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘BARO’ in the Synchronization box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric Settings
not Synchronized
(PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-12 Baro Sync Setting
(AUX - System Setup Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude (in either direction). This is displayed by the barometric pressure setting flashing light blue
when crossing the transition altitude. The flashing stops when the barometric pressure setting is changed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘OFF or ON’ in the ‘BARO TRANSITION ALERT’ box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
5) With the altitude field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired altitude and press the ENT
Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-13 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI, Figure 2-14) displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving tape
labeled at 1000 and 2000 fpm with minor tick marks every 500 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed
in the pointer along the tape. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100
fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape
and the rate appears inside the pointer.
INDEX
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI; Figure 2-14) for reaching
a VNV Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. Refer to
Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
68
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL DEVIATION
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only shown for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units when SBAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
is available.
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-14) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-15) appears to the left of the Altimeter when an ILS frequency is tuned in
the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional
indicator (except it does not appear during a localizer back course approach). If a localizer frequency is tuned
and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure 2-16) appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the
approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet.
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Required
Vertical
Speed
Figure 2-15 Glideslope Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-14 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
Glidepath
Indicator
AFCS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 2-16 Glidepath Indicator
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and 140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
15
14
13
1
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
4
12
5
11
6
10
7
9
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
10
Course Pointer
3
Lateral Deviation Scale
11
Selected Heading Bug
4
Navigation Source
12
Flight Phase
5
Aircraft Symbol
13
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Rose
15
8
OBS Mode Active
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Lubber Line
Figure 2-17 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
70
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course Pointer
Navigation
Source
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
EIS
Course Deviation and
To/From Indicator
Figure 2-18 Arc HSI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue
bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the
Selected Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
AFCS
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
Current Heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Current Track Indicator
Selected
Course
Selected
Heading
APPENDICES
Selected
Heading
Bug
Figure 2-19 Heading and Course Indications
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag
Var’) or referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.
EIS
Figure 2-20 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Nav Angle’ in the ‘Display Units’ box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (denoted with ‘T’)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (‘Mag Var’)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• USER - Angle set according to user input
INDEX
Figure 2-21 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
72
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURN RATE INDICATOR
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Standard
Turn Rate
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EIS
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-22 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
BEARING INFORMATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
NOTE: ADF radio installation is optional.
Frequency
Bearing 1
Pointer
AFCS
Tuning Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG or DME Softkey. The bearing pointers are light blue and are
single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to indicate
the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI
by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Bearing 2
Pointer
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Distance
ADF
Frequency
Pointer 2
Bearing 1 Information Window
APPENDICES
Bearing Source Pointer 1
Bearing Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 2-23 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, optional ADF)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double
line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
EIS
• Frequency (NAV, optional ADF)
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.
AFCS
The DME Information Window (Figure 2-23) is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the
360˚ HSI and in a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2,
or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to
the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
74
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: If a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course is made, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360º HSI
Crosstrack
Error
Flight
Phase
Crosstrack
Error
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Scale
CDI
Arc HSI
Navigation
Source
Navigation
Source
EIS
Flight
Phase
CDI
CDI Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-24 Course Deviation Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC). The full scale limits for the CDI are defined
by a GPS-derived distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the
same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Navigation
Source
Selected on
Both PFDs
APPENDICES
Figure 2-25 Navigation Sources
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the light blue tuning
box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the light blue tuning box over the
NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EIS
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
LOC2
Selected
CDI Softkey
Cycles Through
Navigation Sources
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-26 Selecting a Navigation Source
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
AFCS
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
INDEX
APPENDICES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating
a Vector-to-Final (VTF; see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation
source; GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
76
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In aircraft equipped with 3 displays, if the same VOR/LOC navigation source is selected on both PFDs,
the navigation source annunciation turns yellow on both displays (unless synchronized). Once the CDIs are
synchronized (CDI turned on), they remain synchronized for the entire flight.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Synchronizing the CDIs (3 Display Systems Only):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CDI’ in the Synchronization box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-27 CDI Sync Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECTED’ field in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-28 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
APPENDICES
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-29, Table 2-1).
78
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
Missed
Approach
EIS
Figure 2-29 Automatic CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a departure procedure is active, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not CA or FA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale will not change until
the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or the
leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
AFCS
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm; except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-30 and 2-31). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is activated or if Vector-to-Final (VTF) is selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
79
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
EIS
angle based
on database
information
course width
angle set
by system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
350 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-30 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-31 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal scaling under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not CA or FA
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Approach
LNAV
LNAV+V
Approach
LNAV/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
Missed Approach
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
LNAV
LNAV+V
L/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
MAPR
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-25)
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-26)
0.3 nm
APPENDICES
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
INDEX
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
80
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Extended
Course
Line
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS
Selected
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Returns to Normal
Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Suspends
Waypoint Sequencing
Figure 2-32 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AFCS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-33. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SUSP
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SUSP
Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-33 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
82
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including the
Outside Air Temperature (OAT), wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) in the lower left of the PFD under
normal display conditions. During reversionary display conditions with EIS the OAT is displayed to the right
of the flap indicator; reversionary display conditions without EIS the OAT is shown below the true airspeed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary Mode with EIS
Reversionary Mode without EIS
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 2-34 Outside Air Temperature
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-35 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to show wind data display options.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Head and crosswind components
• OPTN 2: Total wind direction and speed
AFCS
• OPTN 3: Total wind direction with headwind (H) or tailwind (T) and crosswind (X) speed components
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
84
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management Section for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD according to the
criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-36 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
X
X
X
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
AFCS
Criteria
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
SYSTEM ALERTING
EIS
Messages appear in the Alerts Window (in the lower right corner of the PFD; Figure 2-37) when a warning,
caution, advisory alert, or G900X message advisory occurs. System alert messages are provided for aware of
G900X system problems or status and may not require pilot action. The Alerts Window allows system alerts
to be displayed simultaneously. The FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the alert messages. The Alerts
Window is enabled/disabled by pressing the ALERTS Softkey. If the window is already open when a new
message is generated, pressing the ALERTS Softkey to acknowledge the message causes it to turn gray.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ALERTS Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when an alert is issued. The
annunciation flashes and the appropriate aural alert sounds until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. The
softkey then reverts to the ALERTS Softkey label, and when pressed again opens the Alerts Window to display
a descriptive message of the alert.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Annunciation Window appears to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator and displays abbreviated
annunciation text for aircraft alerts. Text color is based on alert level: warnings appear in red, cautions in
yellow, advisory alerts in white. New alerts, regardless of priority, are displayed at the top of the Annunciation
Window, separated by a white line from acknowledged alerts. Once acknowledged, they are sequenced based
on priority.
Comparator
Window
AFCS
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Annunciation
Window
APPENDICES
Alerts
Window
Softkey
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 2-37 G900X Alerting System - 3 Display System
86
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Inner Marker
EIS
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-38 Marker Beacon Annunciations
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G900X System displays traffic symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and
various other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix E for more details about
the Traffic Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA)
is detected, the following automatically occur:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation (Figures 2-39, 2-40) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “Traffic” aural alert is generated, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed (refer
to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment)
AFCS
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic
Symbols
APPENDICES
Figure 2-39 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) or TERRAIN-SVS annunciations appear on the
PFD to the upper left of the Altimeter. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information
on terrain alerts and annunciations.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Map
Enabled,
Displaying
Traffic When
TA Detected
Figure 2-40 Traffic and Terrain Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE ALERTING
The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and aural alerts when the aircraft is approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the installed AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
AFCS
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
• When the aircraft passes to within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue
text on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the aircraft flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an
aural tone is generated.
APPENDICES
Within 1000 feet
Within 200 feet
Deviation of ±200 feet
INDEX
Figure 2-41 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
88
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
when SBAS is available. This annunciation is not shown for systems with TAWS-B or TERRAIN-SVS, unless
TAWS-B or TERRAIN-SVS is inhibited.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a RNAV GPS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter,
flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
Figure 2-42 Low Altitude on RNAV GPS Approach with Vertical Guidance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set
in the Timer/References Window and is reset when the power is cycled. When active, the altitude setting is
displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter
(once the altitude is within the range of the tape).
The following visual annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the ‘BARO MIN’ box appears
with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
AFCS
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
Altitude Reached
APPENDICES
MDA/DH
Bug
INDEX
MDA/DH
Setting
Figure 2-43 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The MDA/DH may be set from the PFD. It is synchronized on both PFDs in a 3 Display System. The function
is reset when the power is cycled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude/decision height and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Minimums’ field (Figure 2-44).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’. ‘OFF’ is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large
FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
EIS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-44 MDA/DH Setting
(Timer/References Window)
90
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see Figure
2-45 for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
INTEG OK
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-45 Example HSI Annunciations
AFCS
Dead Reckoning Mode causes the CDI to be displayed in yellow, then be removed from the display after
20 minutes (when GPS is the selected navigation source) and the following items on the PFD to be shown in
yellow:
• Current Track Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Wind Data (calculated based on GPS information)
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers
APPENDICES
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
Nose Low
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Nose High
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-46 Pitch Attitude Warnings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• Barometric Minimum Descent
Altitude readout
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Timer/References
• Wind data
– Nearest Airports
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Transponder Status Box
– Flight Plan
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• System Time
– Alerts
• Selected Altitude
• PFD Setup Menu
– Procedures
• VNV Target Altitude
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Inset Map
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
92
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The G900X Engine Indication System (EIS) is established based on the installed engine selected
during the software configuration process. Engine gauges, ranges, color bands, and caution and warning
indications are established based on the engine manufacturer’s recommended guidance.
EIS
The G900X Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, and other system parameters
on the left side of the MFD during normal operations (Figure 3-1). On piston aircraft only, EIS information can
also be fully expanded to an entire page by pressing the ENGINE Softkey or turning the large FMS Knob to select
the EIS - Engine Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-1 MFD with EIS display (RV-10 with O-540-series)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; amber and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed
across the instrument.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS indicators shown depend on the engine installed and the aircraft model. The EIS is available for the engines
listed in Table 3-1. Screenshots in this section attempt to depict example aircraft/engine combinations for which
all sensors have been configured. Not all possible displays are shown, nor are the conditions shown on the
indicators meant to depict realistic flight conditions.
EIS
Engine
Manufacturer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lycoming
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Continental
Pratt & Whitney
EIS Supported Engine Models
IO-540-D4A5, D4B5, N1A5, T4A5D, T4C5D, V4A5D
O-540-A*
IO-360-A*, C*, D*, J*, K*, AIO-360* (200 hp)
IO-360-M1A, M1B, B* (Except B1C, B1A), E*, F* (180 hp)
O-360-A* (Except A1C, A4FN), C* (Except C2B, C2D)
O-320- A*, B*, D*, E* (Except D2J)
TIO-540-AE2A
TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC)
TSIO-550-E
IO-550-N
IO-360-ES
PT6A-135A
PT6A-67A
*All models
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 3-1 G900X EIS Supported Engines
94
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.1 PISTON AIRCRAFT EIS
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
3
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each side (left-L, right-R) of a
standard fuel tank. Standard fuel tank quantities are based on published
kitplane manufacturing data.
A cyan marker is displayed next to the selected fuel tank (optional)
Aircraft
Maximum Standard
Fuel Quantity (gal)
Per Side
55
47.5
52.5
85
32.5
21
18
30
40
35
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
IV/IV-P
ES
ES-P
Evolution
Legacy
RV-7/7A
RV-9/9A
RV-10
Seawind 300C
Velocity XL/TXL
EIS
Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
Table 3-2 Maximum Indicated Fuel Quantities
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
5
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
6
Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(OIL °F)
7
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Indicator (EGT °F)
8
TSIO-550-E and TIO-540-AE2A only: Displays the temperature for the right
Turbo Inlet Temperature
(R) and left (L) turbo inlets in °F; the left readout corresponds to the “L”
Indicator (TIT °F)
indication, and the right readout to the “R” indication.
TSIO-550-E, TIO-540-AE2A
and TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC) TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC) only: A single turbo inlet temperature is displayed
only
in °F
Displays the Exhaust Gas Temperature of the hottest cylinder (number is
shown in pointer) in °F
INDEX
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
AFCS
4
95
9
Carburetor Temperature
Indicator
O-540-series, O-360-series,
O-320-series
10
Cylinder Head Temperature Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (number is shown in
pointer) in °F
Indicator (CHT °F)
11
Flap Position and Trim
Indicators
(FLAPS, ELEV TRIM,
RUDDER TRIM,
AILERON TRIM)
Displays carburetor temperature in °F; the cyan range indicates where
carburetor icing is most likely to occur
Displays flap position and elevator, rudder, and aileron trim along slide bars
1
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Up to three trim indicators may be installed; aileron and rudder trim are
mutually exclusive
2
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3
3
AFCS
4
4
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
5
6
6
8
APPENDICES
8
7
TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC)
10
11
INDEX
11
TSIO-550-E
96
10
IO-550-N
Figure 3-2 EIS Displays
(IV/IV-P Shown)
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2
2
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
4
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
6
6
7
7
10
AFCS
9
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
11
IO-540-series
O-540-series
APPENDICES
Figure 3-3 EIS Displays
(RV-10 Shown)
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
97
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
10
10
11
11
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
IO-360-series
(200 hp)
APPENDICES
IO-360-series
(180 hp)
INDEX
Figure 3-4 EIS Displays
(RV-7/7A Shown)
98
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
1
EIS
2
2
5
6
6
7
7
9
9
10
10
11
11
O-320-series
APPENDICES
O-360-series
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
Figure 3-5 EIS Displays
(RV-9/9A Shown)
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
PISTON ENGINE PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EIS - Engine Page displays all engine, fuel, fuel calculation, electrical, and trim information. To access
this page, press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob and select the EIS - Engine Page.
ENGINE
(optional)
DCLTR
ENGINE
ASSIST
CO RST
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
EIS
Select the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 3-6 Engine Page Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENGINE
Level 1
ENGINE
Level 2
ENGINE
LEAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DCLTR
LEAN
ENGINE
ASSIST
CO RST
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
100
Description
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
ASSIST
BACK
Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit
page
Turns off CHTDECand
EGT cylinder readouts(optional)
SYSTEM
FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
BACK
CO RST
Accesses Leaning Assist Mode
Select
the BACK
Softkey to alert generated
Resets CO Guardian; softkey available when
carbon
monoxide
return to the top-level softkeys.
(optional)
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used
to zero
1
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
3
Electrical Group
(ELECTRICAL)
Displays alternator (ALT A) and battery (BATT A) currents in amperes (A)
and main (MAIN V) and essential (ESS V) bus voltages (V) for 14- or 28-V
systems; an Auxiliary Ammeter can be displayed if an optional standby
alternator or battery is installed
The ammeter scales are dependent on the installed alternator.
4
Engine Temperature Group Displays exhaust gas (EGT) and head (CHT) temperatures of all cylinders in °F
(TEMPERATURE)
TSIO-550-E, TIO-540-AE2A, and TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC) only: Displays Turbo
Inlet Temperature (TIT) in °F
O-540-series, O-360-series, O-320-series: Displays carburetor temperature
(CARB) in °F; the cyan range indicates where carburetor icing is most
likely to occur
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Displays calculated fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), and range
(in nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency (in statute miles per
gallon, MPG) based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the
fuel flow totalizer
6
Trim and Flaps Group
(FLAPS, ELEV TRIM,
RUDDER TRIM,
AILERON TRIM)
Displays flap position and elevator, rudder, and aileron trim along slide bars
7
Fuel Pressure Gauge
(FUEL PSI)
Displays fuel pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
8
Fuel Quantity Gauges
(L/R FUEL QTY GAL)
Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each side of a standard
fuel tank. Standard fuel tank quantities are based on published kitplane
manufacturing data; refer to Table 3-2 for maximum indicator values.
A cyan marker is displayed next to the selected fuel tank (optional)
9
Oil Temperature and
Pressure Gauge
(OIL °F PSI)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in pounds
per square inch (psi)
10
Fuel Flow Gauge
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Fuel Calculations Group
(FUEL CALC)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5
Up to three trim indicators may be installed; aileron and rudder trim are
mutually exclusive.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9
EIS
10
7
AFCS
1
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
2
APPENDICES
4
3
INDEX
Figure 3-7 Engine Page (IV/IV-P with TSIO-550-E)
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10
9
8
7
1
6
EIS
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-8 Engine Page (IV/IV-P with IO-550-N)
10
9
8
7
AFCS
1
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
APPENDICES
2
4
3
INDEX
Figure 3-9 Engine Page (RV-10 with IO-540-series)
102
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
9
8
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
10
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
6
EIS
5
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-10 Engine Page (RV-10 with O-540-series)
9
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10
7
AFCS
1
6
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
APPENDICES
4
3
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 3-11 Engine Page (RV-9/9A with IO-360-series, 180 hp)
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10
9
8
7
1
6
EIS
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-12 Engine Page (RV-9/9A with IO-360-series, 200 hp)
10
9
8
7
AFCS
1
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
APPENDICES
2
4
3
INDEX
Figure 3-13 Engine Page (RV-9/9A with O-360-series)
104
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
9
8
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
10
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
6
EIS
5
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-14 Engine Page (RV-9/9A with O-320-series)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ELECTRICAL
The Electrical Group uses vertical bar indicators to display currents for the alternator, battery, standby
alternator or battery (optional), and voltages for the main and essential buses for 14- or 28-V systems. The
ammeter scale(s) are dependent on the installed alternator (60-, 70-, 80-, 100-A).
AFCS
The Auxiliary Ammeter scale is dependent upon the type of optional standby power installed: 0 to 70 A
(alternator) or -30 to 70 A (battery).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Auxiliary Ammeter
(Optional Standby
Battery Current Battery Shown) Main Bus Voltage
Essential Bus Voltage
Alternator Current
APPENDICES
Figure 3-15 Electrical Group
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
TEMPERATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cylinder head (CHT) and exhaust gas (EGT) temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit are displayed for each
cylinder using bar graphs and digital readouts. For the TSIO-550-E, TIO-540-AE2A, Turbo Inlet Temperatures
(TIT) are shown on a sliding bar scale. For the TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC), a single Turbo Inlet Temperature
is shown on a sliding bar scale. Carburetor temperature is shown for the O-540-series, O-360-series, and
O-320-series.
Removing/displaying temperature readouts:
On the Engine Page, press the DCLTR Softkey.
Cylinder Head
Temperatures
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Exhaust Gas
Temperatures
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Carburetor Temperature
(O-540-series, O-360series, O-320-series)
Turbo Inlet Temperatures
(TSIO-550-E, TIO-540-AE2A)
Turbo Inlet Temperature
(TEO-540- iE2 (FADEC)
APPENDICES
Figure 3-16 Engine Temperature Group
CO ALERT RESET
INDEX
If the optional CO Guardian carbon monoxide detector issues a warning for high carbon monoxide levels,
the CO RST Softkey is available on the Engine Page to reset the CO Guardian. Refer to the CO Guardian
documentation for further information.
106
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
CO Warning Issued
Select to Reset CO Guardian
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-17 Carbon Monoxide Alert Reset
FUEL CALCULATIONS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
the fuel was reset.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), range (in nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency
(in statute miles per gallon, MPG) are calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the
fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range also takes into account the aircraft’s heading and the wind direction
and speed.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
On the Engine Page, use the DEC FUEL and INC FUEL softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (GAL REM).
AFCS
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
On the Engine Page, select the RST FUEL Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to the
maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft and fuel used to zero.
APPENDICES
Set Fuel Remaining
Calculated Fuel Used
Calculated Endurance
Calculated Range
Fuel Efficiency
Figure 3-18 Fuel Calculations Group
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based on the endurance (ENDUR), heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and
speed. The solid green circle represents the range until all the remaining fuel is depleted. The dashed green
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
circle indicates the aircraft range until only reserve fuel remains. Once on reserve fuel, the range is indicated
by a solid amber circle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to wind effects. For example, more
fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction is indicated by
the Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol.
EIS
The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled the Fuel Range Ring appears on the Navigation
Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map.
Press the MENU
Key to Display
Navigation Map
Page Setup Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Total Range
(Based on Endurance)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Time to
Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
(Based on Endurance
Minus Reserve Fuel Time)
Set Flight Time
Remaining on
Reserve Fuel
(Reserve Fuel Time)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Difference of
Ranges Based on
Reserve Fuel Time
AFCS
Figure 3-19 Fuel Range Ring and Setup
Enabling/disabling the Fuel Range Ring and selecting a reserve fuel time:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Display the Navigation Map Page (press and hold the CLR Key for 2 seconds to quickly select this map).
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the reserve fuel time, how long the aircraft can fly after reaching the
reserve fuel.
INDEX
8) Enter the desired reserve fuel time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes) and press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
108
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PISTON LEANING ASSIST MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A leaning assist function is available on the Engine Page to assist in the leaning process. While in Leaning
Assist Mode, the EIS Display is shown along with the Fuel Flow Gauge, Fuel Calculations Group, and an
expanded Engine Temperature Group.
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to open the Engine Page.
2) Press the ASSIST Softkey to identify the peak.
EIS
3) Press the ASSIST Softkey again to exit Leaning Assist Mode.
TURBOCHARGED
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Once the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the peak of each TIT is indicated by a cyan bar which moves and
remains at the peak Turbo Inlet Temperature. For the TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC), a single TIT is indicated.
Fuel Flow Gauge
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EIS Display
Fuel
Calculations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TIT Deviation
From Peak
Peak TIT
(Cyan Bar)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Peak TIT
(Cyan Marker)
Lean/Rich
From Peak
Figure 3-20 Leaning Assist Mode (IV/IV-P with TSIO-550-E)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
NORMALLY-ASPIRATED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and EGT readout of the
cylinder with the hottest EGT. For the O-540-series, O-360-series, and O-320-series engines, the Carburetor
Temperature Indicator is removed from the display.
When the first peak is detected, the cylinder numbers disappear, “1st” is annunciated in cyan below that
cylinder’s EGT bar, the temperature is marked in cyan on the graph, and the EGT readout is outlined.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Temperature
Deviation from Peak
(First Cylinder)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cyan Bar
Represents Peak
Indicates First
Cylinder to Peak
Figure 3-21 Leaning Assist Mode (IO-360-series)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder as the fuel flow is decreased and the peak
of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a cyan marker. The last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last”
annunciation below its bar on the graph and the EGT readout is outlined in cyan.
110
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PISTON EIS DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a PFD1, PFD2 (if installed) or MFD display failure, the display(s) operating in Reversionary
Mode are configured to present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for
information about display reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into three displays:
Engine, Lean, and System
The Engine Display, in reversionary mode, is identical to the normal EIS Display on the MFD.
EIS Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 3-22 Reversionary Mode (ES Shown)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
111
ENGINE
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
(optional)
DCLTR
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE
ASSIST
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
CO RST
PISTON EIS SOFTKEYS (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the ENGINE Softkey to
In reversionary
mode the Engine Display is shown by default. To return to the Engine Display from the
return to the top-level softkeys.
Lean or System Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
BACK
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ENGINE
BACK
ASSIST
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(optional)
CO RST
BACK
Select the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENGINE
Level 1
Level 3
Description
Displays second-level engine softkeys
ENGINE
BACK
Displays the EIS Lean Display
LEAN SYSTEM FUEL
CYL SLCT Cycles through the cylinders to obtain information about a particular
cylinder, shown in cyan on the bar graphs
Accesses Leaning Assist Mode
ASSIST
ENGINE SYSTEM
FUEL
BACK
Displays the EIS System Display
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
increments
INC FUEL Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal
(optional)
FUEL INC FUEL
RST FUEL
CO RST fuel capacity
BACK
ENGINE SYSTEM
displayed
fuel remaining
to maximum
for aircraft
RSTFUEL
FUEL ResetsDEC
and fuel used to zero
BACK
Softkey toalert
Resets CO Guardian; softkey available Select
when the
carbon
monoxide
CO RST
return to the top-level softkeys.
generated (optional)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
ENGINE
Level 2
Figure 3-23 EIS Softkeys (Reversionary Mode – Piston Aircraft)
112
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PISTON LEAN DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EIS Lean Display provides information and a user interface to perform engine leaning while in
reversionary mode. Exhaust gas (EGT) and head (CHT) temperatures for each cylinder are displayed in bar
graph form with a readout for the temperature of the selected cylinder shown below each graph. Turbine inlet
temperature (TIT) is also shown for turbocharged aircraft.
Accessing the EIS Lean Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the LEAN Softkey.
EIS
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
By default, the cylinder with the hottest temperature is selected (number highlighted in cyan) when the
LEAN Softkey is selected. Bars for cylinders with temperatures in the normal range are shown in white. On
the CHT Bar Graph, a warning condition for a cylinder is indicated in red.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Since only one cylinder’s EGT and CHT are displayed at a time, this information can be cycled through for
each cylinder pressing the CYL SLCT Softkey; the selected cylinder’s number is highlighted in cyan on the
bar graphs. This softkey is disabled when Leaning Assist Mode is selected or when a cylinder experiences a
warning (red) condition; the softkey remains disabled until the temperature returns to normal.
Monitoring the desired cylinder’s temperatures:
From the Lean Display, press the CYL SLCT Softkey to cycle through each cylinder and view its temperature
information. The selected cylinder number is highlighted in cyan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While in Reversionary Mode, the leaning assist function is available from the Lean Display to assist in the
leaning process.
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the LEAN Softkey.
3) Press the ASSIST Softkey to identify the peak.
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
3
Fuel Flow
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
4
Turbo Inlet Temperature TSIO-550-E and TIO-540-AE2A only: Displays the temperature for the right
(R) and left (L) turbo inlets in °F; the left readout corresponds to the “L”
Indicator (TIT °F)
indication, and the right readout to the “R” indication.
TSIO-550-E, TIO-540AE2A and TEO-540 iE2 TEO-540 iE2 only: A single turbo inlet temperature is displayed in °F
(FADEC) only
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine
power
Gauge (MAN IN HG)
APPENDICES
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ASSIST Softkey again to exit Leaning Assist Mode.
113
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
5
Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) for all cylinders in °F; the readout
is for the hottest cylinder
Bar Graph (EGT °F)
6
Displays head temperatures for all cylinders with a readout for the hottest
Cylinder Head
Temperature Bar Graph cylinder in °F
(CHT °F)
7
Flap Position and Trim
Indicators
(FLAPS, ELEV TRIM,
RUDDER TRIM,
AILERON TRIM)
Displays flap position and elevator, rudder, and aileron trim along slide bars
Up to three trim indicators may be installed; aileron and rudder trim are
mutually exclusive.
1
1
2
2
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
4
4
AFCS
6
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TEO-540 iE2 (FADEC)
5
6
7
7
IO-550-N
TSIO-550-E
INDEX
Figure 3-24 Lean Displays - Reversionary Mode
(IV/IV-P Shown)
114
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2
2
3
3
5
5
6
6
7
7
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
IO-540-series
O-540-series
APPENDICES
Figure 3-25 Lean Displays - Reversionary Mode
(RV-10 Shown)
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
115
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
EIS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
IO-360-series
O-360-series
O-320-series
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-26 Lean Displays - Reversionary Mode
(RV-9/9A)
116
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PISTON SYSTEM DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
The EIS System Display shows the engine manifold pressure, tachometer, various system parameters, and
fuel calculations. Fuel calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the fuel flow
totalizer.
Accessing the EIS System Display:
EIS
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
From the System Display, press the DEC FUEL or INC FUEL Softkey to adjust the fuel remaining (GAL REM).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Resetting the fuel totalizer:
From the System Display, press the RST FUEL Softkey. This resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to the aircraft’s
fuel capacity and the displayed fuel used (GAL USED) to zero
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
Gauge (MAN IN)
Turbocharged Aircraft – Maximum manifold pressure range displayed in red
2
Tachometer (RPM)
3
Oil Temperature (OIL °F) Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
4
Oil Pressure
(OIL PSI)
Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
5
Main Bus Voltage
(MAIN V)
Displays the main bus voltage
6
Alternator Current
(ALT A)
Displays the alternator current in amperes (A)
7
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
8
Calculated Fuel
Remaining
(GAL REM)
Displays the amount of fuel remaining set by the pilot and adjusted for fuel
burn
9
Calculated Fuel Used
(GAL USED)
Displays the calculated amount of fuel used based on the totalizer fuel
flow
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm); the red range
indicates propeller overspeed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
117
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
10
Calculated Endurance
(ENDUR)
Displays flight time remaining in hours:minutes (HH:MM) based on the
calculated fuel remaining
11
Calculated Range
(RANGE NM)
Displays aircraft range in nautical miles (nm) based on the calculated fuel
remaining, the aircraft’s heading, and the wind direction and speed
12
Calculated Fuel Efficiency Displays aircraft fuel efficiency in statute miles per gallon (MPG)
(MPG)
13
Engine Hours (Tach)
(TTL TIME IN SVC)
Displays the total time in hours (hrs) the engine has been in service
14
Flap Position and Trim
Indicators
(FLAPS, ELEV TRIM,
RUDDER TRIM,
AILERON TRIM)
Displays flap position and elevator, rudder, and aileron trim along slide
bars
Green ranges of the trim bars represent correct takeoff trim positions.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
TSIO-550-E
IO-550-N
Figure 3-27 System Displays - Reversionary Mode (IV/IV-P Shown)
118
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
IO-540-series
O-540-series
APPENDICES
Figure 3-28 System Displays - Reversionary Mode
(RV-10) Shown)
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
119
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
12
12
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
IO-360-series
O-360-series
O-320-series
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 3-29 System Displays - Reversionary Mode
(RV-9/9A Shown)
120
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.2 TURBOPROP AIRCRAFT EIS
1
Displays engine torque in foot-pounds (ft-lb)
3
Propeller Speed Gauge
(NP RPM)
4 Gas Generator Speed
Gauge (NG %)
5 Fuel Flow
(FFLOW GPH)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
6
Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
Displays engine oil temperature in °C
Displays DC current in amperes (amps) for the generator (G) and the
alternator (A)
Displays DC bus voltages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10
Displays gas generator speed as a percentage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9
When the engine is not running, ‘OFF’ is annunciated above the ITT readout;
this changes to ‘STRT’ upon engine start. No annunciation is shown when
the engine is running normally (see Figure 3-30).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8
Displays Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) in degrees Celsius (°C)
EIS
7
Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)
Oil Temperature Indicator
(OIL °C)
Ammeter
(AMPS)
Voltmeter
(VOLTS)
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Torque Gauge
(TRQ FT-LB)
2 Interstage Turbine
Temperature Gauge
(ITT °C)
Displays quantities of fuel in gallons in the left (L) and right (R) tanks
Aircraft
AFCS
Evolution
Epic LT
Maximum Standard Fuel
Quantity (gal) Per Side
85
144
11
Aileron and rudder trim are indicated with pointers along slide bars; the
white bars indicate takeoff trim positions
Elevator trim is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff trim position
is indicated with a white bar and T/O label
Flap deflection is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar
APPENDICES
Aileron and Rudder Trim
Bars (AIL, RUD)
Elevator Trim Bar
(ELEV)
Flap Position Indicator
(FLAPS)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 3-3 Maximum Indicated Fuel Quantities
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Engine Off
Engine Start
Normal
EIS
Figure 3-30 Interstage Turbine Temperature Gauge Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
5
6
AFCS
7
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9
APPENDICES
10
11
PT6-series
INDEX
Figure 3-31 EIS Display
(Evolution Shown)
122
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBOPROP SYSTEM DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Display (Figure 3-32) is accessed by pressing the SYSTEM Softkey. The engine gauges and trim
slide bars are displayed, along with readouts separated into two categories: Oil (pressure and temperature) and
Electrical (currents and voltages).
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
1
3
5
6
7
Displays gas generator speed as a percentage
Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays engine oil temperature in °C
Shows oxygen pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays DC current in amperes (amps) for the generator (G) and the
alternator (A)
Displays DC bus voltages
AFCS
Aileron and rudder trim are indicated with pointers along slide bars; the
white bars indicate takeoff trim positions
Elevator trim is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff trim position
is indicated with a white bar and T/O label
Flap deflection is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Ammeter
(GEN A, ALT A)
8 Voltmeter
(BUS 1 V, BUS 2 V)
9 Aileron and Rudder Trim
Bars (AIL, RUD)
Elevator Trim Bar
(ELEV)
Flap Position Indicator
(FLAPS)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
Displays Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) in degrees Celsius (°C)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
Displays engine torque in foot-pounds (ft-lb)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
Torque Gauge
(TRQ FT-LB)
Interstage Turbine
Temperature Gauge
(ITT °C)
Propeller Speed Gauge
(NP RPM)
Generator Speed Gauge
(NG %)
Oil Pressure
(PRES PSI)
Oil Temperature
(TEMP °C)
Oxygen Display
EIS
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
123
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
AFCS
7
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9
10
APPENDICES
PT6-series
INDEX
Figure 3-32 System Display
(Evolution Shown)
124
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBOPROP FUEL DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
The Fuel Display (Figure 3-33) is accessed by pressing the FUEL Softkey. The engine gauges and trim slide bars
are displayed, along with digital readouts separated into three categories: Oil (pressure and temperature), Fuel
(flow, pressure, and quantities), and Fuel Calculations (fuel remaining and used, endurance, and range). The
Fuel Display offers a means to reset the CO Guardian (optional) when a carbon monoxide alert is generated.
EIS
Accessing the EIS Fuel Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the FUEL Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
NOTE: Fuel indications can be configured to display pounds or gallons.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Fuel calculations are based on the fuel flow totalizer and the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM), adjusted
by the pilot using the following softkeys:
• DEC FUEL – Decreases totalizer-based fuel remaining in 10-gallon increments
• INC FUEL – Increases totalizer-based fuel remaining in 10-gallon increments
1
2
5
6
8
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Displays gas generator speed as a percentage
Displays engine oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)
Displays engine oil temperature in °C
Displays current fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)
Displays current fuel pressure in psi
INDEX
9
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)
APPENDICES
7
Displays Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) in degrees Celsius (°C)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4
Displays engine torque in foot-pounds (ft-lb)
AFCS
3
Torque Gauge
(TRQ FT-LB)
Interstage Turbine
Temperature Gauge
(ITT °C)
Propeller Speed Gauge
(NP RPM)
Generator Speed Gauge
(NG %)
Oil Pressure
(PRES PSI)
Oil Temperature
(TEMP °C)
Fuel Flow
(FFLOW GPH)
Fuel Pressure
(PRES PSI)
Fuel Quantities
(QTY L/R GAL)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• RST FUEL – Resets totalizer-based fuel remaining to the aircraft’s fuel capacity and the displayed fuel used
(GAL USED) to zero
Displays quantities of fuel in gallons in the left (L) and right (R) tanks
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
10
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
11
12
13
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
14
Set Fuel Remaining
(GAL REM)
Calculated Fuel Used
(GAL USED)
Calculated Endurance
(ENDUR)
Calculated Range
(RANGE NM)
Aileron and Rudder Trim
Bars (AIL, RUD)
Elevator Trim Bar
(ELEV)
Flap Position Indicator
(FLAPS)
Displays current fuel remaining in gallons as set by the pilot and adjusted for
fuel burn since last set
Displays quantity of fuel used in gallons based on fuel flow since last reset
Displays flight time remaining in hours:minutes (HH:MM) based on the
calculated fuel remaining
Displays aircraft range in nautical miles (nm) based on the calculated fuel
remaining, the aircraft’s heading, and the wind direction and speed
Aileron and rudder trim are indicated with pointers along slide bars; the white
bars indicate takeoff trim positions
Elevator trim is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar; takeoff trim position
is indicated with a white bar and T/O label
Flap deflection is indicated with a pointer along a slide bar
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
3
AFCS
4
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
7
8
APPENDICES
9
10
11
12
INDEX
13
14
PT6-series
Figure 3-33 Fuel Display (Evolution Shown)
126
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CO ALERT RESET
If the optional CO Guardian carbon monoxide detector issues a warning for high carbon monoxide levels,
the CO RST Softkey is available on MFD to reset the CO Guardian.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Resetting a CO Guardian alert:
1) On the MFD, press the ENGINE Softkey.
2) Press the FUEL Softkey.
3) Press the CO RST Softkey (available only when a CO alert is occurring) (Figure 3-34).
EIS
Refer to the CO Guardian documentation for further information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CO Warning Issued
Select to Reset CO Guardian
Figure 3-34 Carbon Monoxide Alert Reset
(Epic LT Shown)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
TURBOPROP EIS DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a PFD1, PFD2 (if installed) or MFD display failure, the display(s) operating in Reversionary
Mode are configured to present PFD symbology together with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview for
information about display reversionary mode). In reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into three displays:
Engine, System, and Fuel.
In reversionary mode, the Engine, System, and Fuel displays are identical to the displays in normal mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
EIS Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-35 Reversionary Mode (Evolution Shown)
128
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
BACK
ASSIST
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
(optional)
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
CO RST
BACK
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURBOPROP EIS SOFTKEYS (NORMAL/REVERSIONARY MODE)
Select the BACK Softkey to
The Engine Display is shown by default. To return to the Engine Display
from the System or Fuel Display,
return to the top-level softkeys.
press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
BACK
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
BACK
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
EIS
ENGINE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(optional)
CO RST
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 3-36 EIS Softkeys (Normal/Reversionary Mode – Turboprop Aircraft)
Level 2
Level 3
ENGINE
SYSTEM
FUEL
Displays second-level engine softkeys
Displays the EIS System Display
Displays the EIS Fuel Display
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and
fuel used to zero
Resets CO Guardian; softkey enabled when carbon monoxide alert
generated (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CO RST
Description
AFCS
DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Level 1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
129
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Blank Page
130
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the audio panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the G900X is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder (1 or 2)
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• Control Unit (optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio Panel
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) (1 or 2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The single or dual Mode S Transponders are controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box
displays the active four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figure 4-1).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and NRST Window
132
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
Nearest Airports Window – Display by pressing the NRST Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Auto-tune entries
when NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large
knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted
cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17
22
23
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
134
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Not used in the G900X
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker (if installed). COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Not used in the G900X.
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
20
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
21
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
22
PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – Turns optional satellite receiver audio on or off.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM 1/2 – Not used in the G900X.
EIS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – Not used in the G900X
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROL UNIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional MFD/PFD Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing MFD/PFD1 operation, data
entry, COM and NAV tuning, and transponder control. The MFD/PFD Control Unit duplicates many PFD
display bezel controls. PFD2 is not controlled by the MFD/PFD Control Unit. Annunciators above the PFD,
MFD, NAV, and COM keys illuminate when their respective control modes are selected. The unit is in MFD
control mode by default on system power-up.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Tune the COM and NAV radios in either MFD or PFD control mode. The appropriate frequency box on the
selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate control
unit activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancellation of the previous
radio tuning mode.
1
13
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11
10
9
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
3
AFCS
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
5
4
Figure 4-3 MFD/PFD Control Unit
APPENDICES
Tuning Selection
Box
INDEX
Figure 4-4 Frequency Tuning with the MFD/PFD Control Unit
136
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
5
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
6
SEL Key – Arrows move light blue Softkey Selection Box on selected display. Press the center to activate
the selected softkey
7
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
8
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit. The NAV tuning box is
outlined with a light blue selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
9
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the MFD/PFD Control Unit. The COM tuning box is
outlined with a light blue selection line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit.
10
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
11
PFD Key – When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit is used to access PFD functions.
12
MFD Key – When selected, the MFD/PFD Control Unit is used to access MFD functions (default control
mode).
13
FMS/NAV-COM Knob – NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. MFD/PFD Control
Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/numbers).
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD CONTROL UNIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional MFD Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing MFD operation, data entry, COM
and NAV tuning, and transponder control. The MFD Control Unit duplicates many PFD display bezel controls.
Annunciators beside the FMS, XPDR, COM, and NAV keys illuminate when their respective control modes are
selected. The unit is in FMS control mode by default on system power-up.
The appropriate frequency box on the selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes
for a few seconds to indicate control unit activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode
results in cancelation of the previous radio tuning mode.
2
3
4
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
7
8
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
14
AFCS
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
13
12
11
Figure 4-5 GCU 477 MFD Control Unit
APPENDICES
Tuning Selection
Box
INDEX
Figure 4-6 Frequency Tuning with the Control Unit
138
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FMS Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control FMS functions on the MFD. When pressed, an annunciator next
to the key illuminates indicating adjustment of the FMS Knob will now affect FMS functions.
6
COM Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the COM radios. The first press will select COM1,
as indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select COM2. This is annunciated
with a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the COM Key will switch between COM1 and
COM2. Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected COM The COM Tuning Selection Box is outlined with a
light blue line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit (Figure 4‑4).
7
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
8
NAV Key – Sets the FMS Knob to control tuning of the NAV radios. The first press will select NAV1, as
indicated by an illuminated “1” to the left of the key. Press again to select NAV2. This is annunciated with
a “2” to the right of the key. Each subsequent press of the NAV Key will switch between NAV1 and NAV2.
Use the FMS Knob to tune the selected NAV. The NAV Tuning Selection Box is outlined with a light blue
line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
9
XPDR Key – Sets the FMS Knob to enter transponder codes. When pressed, an annunciator next to the
key illuminates indicating the FMS Knob can now be used for transponder code entry. Transponder code
entry can be performed with either the number keypad or FMS Knob.
10
IDENT Key – Press to activate the IDENT function of the transponder. When the IDENT Key is pressed,
a green IDNT indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for 18 seconds.
11
SEL Key – The center of this key activates the selected MFD softkey, while the right and left arrows move
the softkey selection box to the right and left, respectively.
12
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
13
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
14
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/numbers).
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. This knob provides tuning capability for the COM and
NAV radios when the appropriate COM or NAV key is presssed. When the XPDR Key is pressed, the
transponder code may be entered using the FMS Knob. The large knob moves the cursor in the window.
The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G900X for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EIS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and
the two standby frequencies are on the right. Select the COM transceiver for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
AFCS
Tuning Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-7 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
140
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
EIS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-8 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to enable
or disable Automatic Squelch
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-9 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Manual frequency tuning from the optional Control Unit
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS or NAV/COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz;
small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
EIS
Second, Turn the FMS or NAV/
COM Knob to Enter a Frequency
into the COM Standby Frequency
Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Third, Press the Frequency
Transfer Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
First, Press the COM Key to
Place the Tuning Selection
Box on the COM frequencies
Figure 4-10 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
Figure 4-11 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-12 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
142
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
Tune COM frequencies from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
Tune COM frequencies for the nearest airports from the Nearest Airports Window on the PFD. When the
desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency Transfer Key places
this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-13 Nearest Airports Window
Select the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Load frequencies into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page group by highlighting
the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-15, 4-16, and 4-17).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
pressing the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-16).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
Figure 4-14 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-15 Nearest Pages Menus
144
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, place the cursor on the frequency field by pressing the FMS Knob
and scrolling through the list. Transfer the frequency to the COM Standby Field with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
EIS
Runway
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-16 WPT – Airport Information Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select INFO-x Softkey
for AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into PFD1
COM Standby Field.
Cursor then advances
to the next frequency.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tune COM frequencies from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
146
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-18 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G900X softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-19 AUX – System Setup Page
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. While Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is continuous (static noise is heard over the headsets and speaker).
Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EIS
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
Squelch
Indication
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to disable
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to enable
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-20 Overriding Automatic Squelch
VOLUME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjust COM radio volume level from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is
displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after the change.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-21 COM Volume Level
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
148
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
Press the CDI Softkey on the PFD to select a NAV radio for navigation. The active NAV frequency selected for
navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the navigation radio. Pressing
the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a third time
activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
AFCS
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Selecting
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-22 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The NAV Frequency Box displays the decoded Morse Code station identifier that is received from the
navigation source. Audio verification of the selected station identifier is still required, and can be accomplished
by selecting the corresponding NAV radio on the audio panel and pressing the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select NAV radios for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the NAV1,
NAV2, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over the headset
and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
Figure 4-23 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
APPENDICES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
Figure 4-24 NAV Frequency Tuning
150
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Manual NAV frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the NAV Key to enable the FMS Knob for NAV tuning. The NAV Tuning Selection Box is shown.
2) Press the NAV Key again, if needed, to select the desired NAV radio (1 or 2).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
Or:
Press the numeric keys on the keypad to enter a Frequency.
EIS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
If an error is made during frequency entry with the numeric keypad, pressing the BKSP Key moves the
cursor back one space. If an incorrect frequency is entered, reenter the correct one using the same procedure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Third, Press the Frequency
Transfer Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
First, Press the NAV Key to activate NAV
tuning from the FMS Knob or Numeric
Keypad
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Second, Turn the FMS Knob or Press
the Numeric Keys to Enter a Frequency
into the NAV Standby Frequency Box
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-26 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On
Station
Identifier
AFCS
Figure 4-27 NAV Radio ID Indication
VOLUME
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjust NAV Radio volume level from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
APPENDICES
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
INDEX
Figure 4-28 NAV Volume Levels
152
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
Select and load NAV frequencies from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – VOR Information
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Load frequencies into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page group by highlighting
the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-29, 4-30, and 4-31).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
pressing the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-31).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-29 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
153
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-30 Nearest Pages Menus
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. Use the FMS
Knob or ENT Key to scroll through the list. Place the cursor on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and load
it into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
APPENDICES
Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
INDEX
Figure 4-31 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
154
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, tune NAV frequencies from the NRST – Nearest Airports, WPT – Airport Information,
WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the
appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-32 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
156
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be disabled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
EIS
Outer Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-34 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-32). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
DME TUNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the G900X for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The G900X System tunes the optional DME transceiver. Tune the UHF DME frequency by pairing with a
VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. Select NAV1,
NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window to tune the DME transceiver. Pressing the DME Softkey shows
or hides the DME Tuning Window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DME
Modes
Figure 4-35 DME Tuning Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
AFCS
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
INDEX
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
158
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER(S)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The single or dual GTX 33 or GTX 33 with Extended Squitter Mode S Transponder(s) provide Mode A, Mode C,
and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes
the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability to exchange information between aircraft and Air Traffic Control (ATC)
facilities
• Surveillance identifier capability
EIS
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Mode S Elementary Surveillance (ELS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Extended squitter (Optional) – The extended squitter is transmitted periodically and contains information such
as altitude (barometric and GPS), GPS position, and aircraft identification. The purpose of extended squitter is
to provide aircraft position and identification to ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and other aircraft.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
AFCS
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: XPDR1,
XPDR2 (optional), STBY, ON, ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, ADS-B TX (optional), BACK.
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
INDEX
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
159
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
XPDR1
(Optional)
XPDR2
STBY
ON
ALT
VFR
XPDR
IDENT
CODE
IDENT
(Optional)
ADS-B TX
BACK
ALERTS
EIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
Figure 4-36 Transponder Softkeys (PFD) (Dual Transponders Shown)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting and activating Transponder 1 or Transponder 2:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the XPDR1 or XPDR2 Softkey to select and activate the other transponder.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When powering on the G900X, the system activates Transponder 1 as the default unit, regardless of which
transponder was active prior to shutdown. When switching between Transponder 1 and Transponder 2, the
code and mode remain the same. If a new code is entered in the active transponder, switching transponders
does not bring back the previous code.
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
AFCS
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, On, and Altitude Modes). The STBY,
ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
160
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder
is powered and new codes can be entered, but no replies or squitters are transmitted.. When Standby is
selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data
Box.
EIS
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-37 Standby Mode
ON MODE (MANUAL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies as well as transmission of acquisition and extended squitters, including ADS-B out (if equipped).
Mode S replies will not include altitude information. Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a
green ON indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-38 ON Mode
AFCS
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The white Altitude Reporting Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground.
White Altitude Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while on the ground. White
Altitude Mode generates Mode S replies to discrete interrogations as well as transmission of acquisition and
extended squitters, including ADS-B out (if equipped). Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S all-call replies are
inhibited.
If Altitude Mode is selected while on the ground, a white ALT indication and transponder code appear in
the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
APPENDICES
ALT Mode (Mode C
Altitude Reporting
inhibited)
Figure 4-39 Altitude Mode
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The green Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Green Altitude
Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey while airborne. Green Altitude Mode
generates Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S replies as well as transmissions of acquisition and extended squitters
including ADS-B out (if equipped).
If Altitude Mode is selected while airborne, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are
provided with pressure altitude information.
EIS
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-40 Altitude Mode
REPLY STATUS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-41 Reply Indication
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
AFCS
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Press the BKSP
Softkey to move the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
APPENDICES
Entering
a Code
INDEX
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code
162
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
EIS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-43 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
Manual code entry from the Control Unit
1) Press the XPDR Key to select the transponder code field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits, turn the large FMS Knob to select the
last two digits, and turn the small FMS Knob to enter the last two code digits.
Or:
Press the numeric keys on the keypad to enter a code.
AFCS
If an error is made during code entry with the numeric keypad, press the BKSP Key to move the cursor
back one space. If an incorrect code is entered, reenter the correct one using the same procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Third, Press ENT Key to
Complete Code Entry
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Second, Turn the FMS Knob, Small
Knob to Enter Two Code Digits at a
Time, Large Knob to Move the Cursor
to the Next Code Field, or Press the
Numeric Keys to Enter a Code into the
Transponder Data Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
First, Press the XPDR Key to
Activate Code Entry from the
FMS Knob or Numeric Keypad
into the Transponder Data Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-44 Transponder Code Entry from the Control Unit
VFR CODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
AFCS
VFR Code
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-45 VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Press the IDENT Softkey to send a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
164
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IDNT
Indication
Select the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-46 IDENT Softkey and Indication
EIS
ADS-B TX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If equipped with an optional GTX 33 ES Transponder, transmission of extended squitters containing ADS-B
out information is enabled/disabled by pressing the ADS-B TX Softkey. ADS-B transimssion defaults to enabled
at each power cycle. Do not disable ADS-B transmission unless requested by ATC.
Even with the ADS-B TX enabled, transmission of extended squitters containing ADS-B out information will
vary based on the current mode of the transponder
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B Transmission
Enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-47 Altitude Mode
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
AFCS
center for configuration.
Flight ID Reporting is an optional feature for the G900X.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering Flight
ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.
If configuration is set to “SAME AS TAIL” the aircraft tail number will always be displayed.
Entering a Flight ID:
APPENDICES
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry. The word “updating” appears until the new entry is completed.
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
Flight ID
PFD Entry
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-48 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
166
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
POWER-UP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G900X.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker (if installed). Press the SPKR Key to select and deselect the
cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot,
traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Volume can be adjusted though configuration.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-49 Speaker Key
AFCS
INTERCOM
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Audio Panel includes a six-position intercom system (ICS) and a stereo music input for the pilot, copilot
and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft
radios.
APPENDICES
Figure 4-50 Intercom Controls
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
167
Pilot Hears
Copilot Hears
Passenger Hears
OFF
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, copilot, passengers,
music
ON
OFF
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot
Copilot,
passengers,
music
Copilot,
passengers,
music
EIS
PILOT KEY
Annunciator
OFF
ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers, music
Copilot
Selected radios, aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
music
ON
ON
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot
Passengers;
music
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COPLT KEY
Annunciator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
168
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Press the PILOT/PASS Knob to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by the
VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.
EIS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).
Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch Annunciation
AFCS
Volume Annunciation
Figure 4-51 Volume/Squelch Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is pressed on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PA Key is Selected
on the Audio Panel
Figure 4-52 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Press the PLAY Key once to play the latest recorded memory block.
The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off after the
present memory block has finished playing.
Press the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block to stop play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
AFCS
Press the PLAY Key while audio is playing to play the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent
press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-53 Play Key
170
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Audio level for an external music input can be adjusted through configuration.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel provides a stereo auxiliary entertainment input. The input is compatible with popular
portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. A 3.5-mm stereo phone jack can optionally be
installed in a convenient location. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the
jack.
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
EIS
Music can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT Annunciators are
extinguished. Music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated and by the
copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Music is always soft muted when
an interruption occurs from an aircraft radio. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to its original volume
level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and four seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press and hold the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds to switch music muting on and off. When switching,
either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two beeps indicate music
muting is disabled. Music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
XM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
XM Radio audio will not be available when a device is connected to the optional 3.5-mm music jack.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the G900X System, the following steps will aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel
as well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to ensure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation
AFCS
Volume
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-54 Audio Panel Controls
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
APPENDICES
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs clockwise two full turns. This sets the headset intercom audio level to max volume
(least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT/PASS Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
INDEX
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
172
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the G900X includes equipment failures of the G900X components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
EIS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-55 Stuck Microphone Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-56 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD FAILURE, DUAL SYSTEM
APPENDICES
If PFD1 fails, COM1 and NAV1 display a red X on both remaining displays. NAV1 will be unavailable.
COM1 automatically tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown. The COM1 emergency frequency is
available to both the copilot and pilot.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
INDEX
Figure 4-57 Frequency Section of MFD Display after PFD1 Failure
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If PFD2 fails, COM2 and NAV2 display a red X on the remaining PFD display. NAV2 will be unavailable.
COM2 tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown. The COM2 emergency frequency is available to
both the copilot and pilot.
Figure 4-58 PFD1 Display after PFD2 Failure
PFD FAILURE, SINGLE SYSTEM (REVERSIONARY MODE)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-59 Reversionary Mode Button
174
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G900X is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G900X.
EIS
The most prominent part of the G900X are the full color displays: one or two Primary Flight Displays (PFD)
and a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors
is displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of
flight management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/
VNAV, LP, LP+V, or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Page Title
Map Orientation
Nearest Airport Box
(No EIS Config)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Nearest Frequencies
Box (No EIS Config)
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
AFCS
Destination Airport
Box (No EIS Config)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Time Box
(No EIS Config)
Map Range
Flight Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
176
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Navigation Status Box
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
EIS
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
Symbol
Description
Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Description
Left Holding Pattern
Direct-to
Vector to Final
Right Procedure Turn
Right DME Arc
Left Procedure Turn
Left DME Arc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right Holding Pattern
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
FOD
GS
ISA
LDG
MSA
TAS
TKE
TRK
Fuel over Destination
Ground Speed
ISA Relative Temperature
ETA at Final Destination
Minimum Safe Altitude
True Air Speed
Track Angle Error
Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Bearing
Distance
Desired Track
Endurance
ETE to Final Destination
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Fuel on Board
AFCS
BRG
DIS
DTK
END
ENR
ESA
ETA
ETE
FOB
MFD Navigation Status Box
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitude (MSA) and enroute safe altitude (ESA) are different values
than shown on an instrument approach plate. See the glossary entries for MSA and ESA for details on the
meaning of the displayed values.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
178
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
• Map Pointer information (distance and
bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Topography scale
• Topography data
• Obstacle data
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map range
•Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Nav range ring
• Fuel range ring
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in the G900X to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G900X maps
can display the following information:
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• Direct-to Window
• PFD Inset Map
• Procedure Loading Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• AUX - Trip Planning
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
INDEX
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page:
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
EIS
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Setup
Selection
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
Map Group Selection
AFCS
Orientation Field
Auto North Up
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- On/Off
- Minimum Range
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
180
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO NORTH UP’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G900X to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
Range Overzoom
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-6 Map Range
APPENDICES
AUTO ZOOM
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Auto zoom allows the G900X to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD(s) and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
EIS
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
AFCS
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
INDEX
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
182
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
MAP PANNING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
AFCS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Pointer
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Map
Pointer
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
184
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Information about
Point of Interest
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Map Pointer on POI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
Information about
Airspace
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Pointer on
Airspace
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAVAID
Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GO BACK Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
186
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
EIS
Airspace
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Measurement Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pointer Lat/Long
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement Line
INDEX
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
188
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures. Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation
map.
Displaying/removing Profile View
1) From the Navigation Map Page, press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
EIS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ and press the ENT Key.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TOPO Off
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Black Background
TOPO On
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
AFCS
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
APPENDICES
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
EIS
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Ground Elevation at Pointer
Location (only visible when
Pointer is displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
INDEX
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Symbol
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
192
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
2000
500
150
300
50
100
3
Off
15
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
VRP (VRP WAYPOINT)
15
30
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
APPENDICES
2000
250
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT) (Longest Runway ≥ 8100 ft)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT) (8100 ft > Longest
Runway ≥ 5000 ft)
Small Airports (SMALL APT) (Longest Runway < 5000 ft)
(Medium Airport if it has a tower frequency)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2000
AFCS
2000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2000
EIS
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LAND DATA
On/Off
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
INDEX
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
8) Select the desired range.
194
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Display Range
EIS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
APPENDICES
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DECLUTTER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
196
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AFCS
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways
(Victor Airways or T-Routes) start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to 18,000 feet mean sea
level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” or a “T” before the airway number.
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes or Q-Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL. High Altitude Airways are designated with a “J” or a “Q” before the airway number.
EIS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
Low Altitude
Airway
(T-Route)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
High Altitude
Airway
(Q-Route)
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Map
APPENDICES
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAY Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only.
198
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only.
5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Display Selection
Low Altitude Airway Range
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
High Altitude Airway Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
AFCS
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
APPENDICES
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
500
INDEX
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRACK VECTOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
EIS
Track Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
Wind Vector On/Off
APPENDICES
Nav Range Ring On/Off
INDEX
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
200
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND VECTOR
Wind Direction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
EIS
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NAV RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range (radius)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
AFCS
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
INDEX
- System Setup Page.
202
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid amber circle.
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) lateral field of view. The
field of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is
only available if SVT is installed on the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
204
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Range to
Altitude Arc
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NO-EIS OPTION
Navigation
Information
Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the G900X is configured with the “no-EIS” option, the EIS display is removed from the Navigation Map and
is replaced with the Navigation Information Display shown in Figure 5-30.
Mode
Softkey
AFCS
Figure 5-31 Optional No-EIS Navigation Information Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Navigation Information Display operates in two modes, automatic mode and destination mode. The
mode is toggled by pressing the AUTO or DEST Softkey. The display defaults in automatic mode (softkey label
displays ‘AUTO’). In destination mode, the softkey label displays ‘DEST’. Figure 5-32 shows the various modes
of operation for the display.
206
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Destination Mode,
KMCI to KICT Flight
Plan Loaded
Auto Mode,
No Flight Plan Loaded
AFCS
Auto Mode,
KMCI to KICT Flight
Plan Loaded
Destination Mode,
No Flight Plan Loaded
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-32 Navigation Information Display Modes of Operation
The next sections describe the four Data Boxes within the Navigation Information Display.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NEAREST AIRPORT BOX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airport Box is displayed in automatic and destination mode. When no airports are within 200
NM of the aircraft position, the Nearest Airport Box displays “NONE WITHIN 200 NM”. When the aircraft
position is within 200 NM of an airport, the fields shown in Figure 5-33 are displayed in the Nearest Airport
Box.
1
6
EIS
2
7
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8
4
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Identifier
2
Airport Name (Always Visible)
3
Vertical Speed Required (Vertical Speed Necessary at Current Ground Speed to perform a straight descent to airport,
with a range of ± 5000 fps, beyond which it becomes dashed
4
COM Type
5
Longest Runway (Displayed when Airport is not the Destination Airport)
6
METAR Flag (When METAR information available)
7
Position From (Distance and Direction from Nearest Airport)
8
Bearing to Nearest Airport
9
COM Frequency (Displayed when Airport is not the Destination Airport)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-33 Nearest Airport Box
208
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEAREST FREQUENCY BOX
The Nearest Frequency Box is displayed in the automatic mode and not displayed in the destination mode.
When no nearest frequencies are detected, the Nearest Frequency Box displays “NONE WITHIN 200 NM”.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
Figure 5-34 Nearest Frequency Box
Air Route Traffic Control Center Frequency (Frequencies) of ARTCC nearest to present position; visible when nearest
frequency detected
2
Frequency of Weather Station nearest to present position; visible when nearest weather station is detected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DESTINATION AIRPORT BOX
The Destination Airport Box is displayed in automatic and destination mode.
The destination airport for which the information is displayed is determined as follows.
• The destination airport is the last airport in the active flight plan if:
AFCS
- No arrival or approach is loaded, or
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach is loaded, or
- The active leg is past the MAP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The destination airport is the airport prior to the procedure(s) in the active flight plan if:
- An arrival and/or approach is loaded and neither are active
• The destination airport is the airport associated with the approach if:
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded, or
APPENDICES
- The approach is active
• The destination airport is the Direct-to waypoint if:
- The Direct-to waypoint is not in the active flight plan and is an airport
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
If none of these conditions are met, then the destination airport is undefined, and a single label is displayed in
the box, reading “NO DESTINATION AIRPORT”. When a destination airport has been determined, the fields
shown in Figure 5-35 are displayed in the Destination Airport Box.
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
1
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3
4
5
6
7
EIS
8
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-35 Destination Airport Box
1
Airport Identifier; always visible
2
METAR Flag, colored flag indicating METAR condition at airport, visisble when METAR information available
3
Airport Name; always Visible
4
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
6
Bearing To, directional bearing to destination airport, always visible
7
Route Distance; total distance from present position to final destination through all waypoints, always visible
8
9
INDEX
10
11
210
Position From; distance and Bearing from Destination Airport (visible when the destination mode is active, or when
the Nearest Airport is same as the destination airport, or when no ARTCC frequencies are detecetd
Vertical Speed Required. Vertical speed necessary at current ground speed to perform a straight descent to airport,
with a maximum of 5000, beyond which it becomes dashed: “----”. Visible when destination mode active, or when
nearest airport is same as destination airport, or when no ARTCC frequencies are detected
Traffic Pattern Altitude; Traffic Pattern Altitude of destination airport. Visible when destination mode active, or when
nearest airport is same as destination airport, or when one or fewer ARTCC frequencies are detected
COM Frequency, frequency of airport primary communication channel. Visible when destination mode active, or
nearest airport is same as destination airport.
Nearest Weather Station; frequency of weather station nearest to destination airport. Visible when destination mode
active, or nearest airport is same as destination airport
Longest Runways, identifier and size of the longest or the two longest runways. Identifier and size of the longest or
the two longest runways. One: Always visible; Two: visible when destination mode active, or nearest airport is same
as destination airport
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TIME BOX
The Time Box is always visible.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
3
EIS
Figure 5-36 Time Box
Estimated Time Enroute; visible when destination is set
2
Estimated Time of Arrival; sum of the present time and ETE, visible when destination is set
3
Flight Time (total time since takeoff) ‘FLT’ if in-air timer is selected on AUX Utility Page, otherwise ‘PWR’. Always
visible.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G900X. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G900X’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
AFCS
Waypoint Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-37 Waypoint Information Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
212
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-38 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation
Map
Showing
Selected
Airport
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airport/
Runway
Diagram
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-39 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
AFCS
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
Airport Directory
Information
Airport Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Softkeys
Figure 5-40 Airport Directory Page Example
214
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey
until INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the
Airport Directory Page:
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
EIS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G900X provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list
of up to 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
AFCS
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
NRST Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-41 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
216
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
Airport Information
EIS
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
- Lat/Long
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-42 Airport Information Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to three approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Showing Nearest Airport
Nearest Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
EIS
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Approaches Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-43 Nearest Airport Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
218
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
INDEX
Figure 5-44 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EIS
Selected Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
AFCS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-45 Intersection Information Page
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
220
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven Intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest Intersection
EIS
Nearest Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Intersection Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
AFCS
Figure 5-46 Nearest Intersections Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
Selected NDB
Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB
NDB Identifier/Type
EIS
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
AFCS
Figure 5-47 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Selecting an NDB:
APPENDICES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
222
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Nearest NDB
EIS
NDB Identifier/Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
AFCS
Figure 5-48 Nearest NDB Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
EIS
Selected VOR
Navigation Map Showing Selected VOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
VOR Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-49 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:
APPENDICES
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Or:
224
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
EIS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
Nearest VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
APPENDICES
VOR Frequency
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 5-50 Nearest VOR Page
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VRPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VRP Information Page is used to view information about visual reporting points (VRPs). In addition to
displaying a map of the currently selected VRP and surrounding area, the VRP Information Page displays VRP
information in two boxes labeled ‘VRP’ and ‘INFORMATION’’.
Selected VRP
Navigation Map Showing Selected VRP
VRP Identifier/Symbol
EIS
- VRP Name
VRP Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Country
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
- Lat/Long
Figure 5-51 VRP Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a VRP:
1) With the VRP Information Page displayed, enter the identifier or the name of the VRP in the VRP Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VRP Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VRP Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
226
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest VRP Page can be used to quickly find a VRP close to the aircraft. In addition to displaying a
map of the surrounding area, the Nearest VRP Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VRPs in two
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VRP’ and ‘INFORMATION’. The list only includes VRPs that are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the VRP identifier indicates the selected VRP. Up to eleven VRPs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no VRPs in the list, text indicating
that there are no nearest VRPs is displayed. If there are no nearest VRPs in the list, the information is dashed.
Nearest VRP
EIS
VRP Identifier/Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Bearing/Distance to VRP
from aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VRP Information
- VRP Name
- Country
- Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-52 Nearest VRP Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
User Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from an
existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has been
created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down.
Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint
EIS
Selected User Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
User Waypoint List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier
- Comment
# User Wpts Used
AFCS
Softkeys
Figure 5-53 User Waypoint Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
228
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint
Selected User Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest User Wpt List
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-54 Nearest User Waypoint Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
AFCS
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
APPENDICES
Or:
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Figure 5-55 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
230
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
EIS
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming user waypoints:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Enter a new name.
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
AFCS
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
232
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TFR
Alert Area
AFCS
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
Figure 5-56 Airspaces
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
234
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspace Alerts Box
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
APPENDICES
INDEX
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-57 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
EIS
Airspace 1
Airspace Alerts Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
AFCS
Figure 5-58 Nearest Airspaces Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
236
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace
within 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead – less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less than
2 nm.
EIS
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Smart Airspace function de-emphasizes airspaces above or below the current aircraft altitude. The function
does not require the aircraft present position or flight path to enter the lateral boundaries of the airspace. If the
current aircraft altitude is within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace, the airspace boundary is
shown normally. If the current aircraft altitude is not within 1100 feet of the vertical boundaries of the airspace,
the airspace boundary is shown subdued.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Smart Airspace Off
Smart Airspace On
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-59 Smart Airspace
Turning smart airspace on or off:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘GROUP’ Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Aviation’ in the ‘GROUP’ Box and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SMART AIRSPACE’ field in the Aviation Map Setup Window.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn smart airspace On or counterclockwise to turn smart airspace Off
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G900X establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to
the selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to
or flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
Direct-to Point Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
AFCS
- Bearing/Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Desired Course
APPENDICES
Figure 5-60 Direct-to Window - MFD
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
Direct-to Point Info
INDEX
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Activation Command
Figure 5-61 Direct-to Window - PFD
238
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-62 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
INDEX
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
240
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G900X resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Page Menu
- Cancel Direct-To Navigation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-63 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When navigating a direct-to, the G900X sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
APPENDICES
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EIS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint,
or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior
to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to.
All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
242
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
Page Menu
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-64 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on the G900X consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G900X allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg (TOPO On)
Active Course Leg (TOPO Off)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Heading Leg or Active Roll Steering Path (TOPO On)
Active Heading Leg or Active Roll Steering Path (TOPO Off)
Course Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Course Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Course Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Heading Leg or Roll Steering Path (TOPO On)
Heading Leg or Roll Steering Path (TOPO Off)
Turn Anticipation Arc (TOPO On/TOPO Off)
AFCS
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 100 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can
be activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G900X uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G900X automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
INDEX
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
244
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
EIS
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
Non-Active, Flight Plan Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active Flight Plan Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active FPL Waypoint List
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn Anticipation Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
APPENDICES
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-65 Active Flight Plan Page
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EIS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-67 Flight Plan Catalog Page
APPENDICES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G900X is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
NOTE: The system supports AFCS lateral guidance for all leg types (using NAV or FMS APPR mode). The
INDEX
system does not support course deviation for any heading leg types (VA, VD, VI, VM, or VR).
246
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
EIS
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
AFCS
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-68 Flight Plan Import
248
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 5-69 Flight Plan Export
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be transferred to the system from a mobile device via the Flight Stream 210 Bluetooth
wireless connection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Previewing a flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Or:
EIS
Select the PREVIEW Softkey to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the MENU Key, select ‘Preview Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Preview Flight Plan Page is
displayed.
Ignoring a flight plan transfer from a wireless connection:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) When a flight plan transfer has been initiated from a mobile device, a Pending Flight Plan pop-up alert appears
in the lower right corner of the MFD, and an Connext annunciation appears to the right of the MFD page name.
2) Press the CLR Key to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight plan will
still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the IGNORE Softkey to remove the pop-up alert and ignore the pending flight plan. The pending flight
plan will still be available on the Flight Plan Catalog page.
AFCS
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pending Flight Plan
APPENDICES
Pending Flight Plan
Pop-Up Alert
IGNORE Softkey
PREVIEW Softkey
INDEX
Figure 5-70 Pending Flight Plan Transfer
250
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pending Connext Action
Annunciator
Pending Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
STORE? or ACTIVATE?
Selection
DELETE Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STORE Softkey
ACTIVATE Softkey
Figure 5-71 Preview Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Storing a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
4) Select the STORE Softkey to store the flight plan.
Or:
Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘STORE?’. Press the ENT Key
to store the flight plan.
AFCS
Or:
Press the MENU Key, select ‘Store Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to store the flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) The pending flight plan is stored and the pending annunciation is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Activating a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the pending flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the Preview Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
4) Select the ACTIVATE Softkey to activate the flight plan.
Or:
EIS
Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’. Press the ENT Key
to activate the flight plan.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) The pending flight plan becomes the active flight plan and is removed from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the MENU Key, select ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired pending flight plan.
Deleting a pending flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Select the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the pending flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting all pending flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) Highlight ‘Delete All Pending’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all pending flight plans?’ confirmation window
is displayed.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all pending flight plans. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4)
252
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are
limited to 100 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in
the flight plan exceeds 100, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
Figure 5-72 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Full Message
INDEX
Figure 5-73 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
Figure 5-74 Duplicate Waypoints Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
APPENDICES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
254
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G900X also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Waypoint Sequence
Preview of Selected Airway
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-75 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Exit Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Exit Points
Available
AFCS
Preview of
Selected Airway
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-76 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
256
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-77 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
AFCS
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G900X database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
EIS
Flight Plan Name
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- New Waypoint
- Load Departure
- Load Arrival
- Load Approach
- Activate Flight Plan
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-78 Stored Flight Plan Page
258
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected Departure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departures Available at
KMKC
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 79 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure Airport
Selected Departure
Selected Runway
Selected Transition
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Departure Transition Points
Available
Preview of
Selected Departure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Departure End
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-80 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
Inserted Departure Header
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
INDEX
Figure 5-81 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
260
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-82 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-83 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Inserted Arrival Header
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
INDEX
Figure 5-84 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
262
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approaches Available at
KCOS
Barometric Minimum
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected
Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-85 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
INDEX
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Selected Approach
Selected Transition
EIS
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of Selected
Approach
Load Approach?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-86 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Inserted Approach Header
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-87 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
264
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G900X is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
AFCS
Stored Flight Plan Info
Figure 5-88 Stored Flight Plan Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
AFCS
The G900X allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G900X memory.
INDEX
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
266
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G900X allows deletion of an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by
the G900X.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
APPENDICES
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
INDEX
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
268
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
270
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-89 Along Track Offset
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting Parallel Track
Figure 5-90 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
272
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-91 Parallel Track Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Parallel Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Original Track
Parallel Track Waypoints
AFCS
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- SLN-p
- GLIDE-p
- HYS-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight plan
from the current position on
(will not affect an approach)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-92 Parallel Track Active
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
Subdued Prompt
EIS
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-93 Parallel Track Unavailable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
AFCS
Cancel Prompt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Status
Figure 5-94 Cancelling Parallel Track
APPENDICES
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
274
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
The G900X allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current
Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Destination
Waypoint
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
Figure 5-95 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
275
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-96 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
276
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-97 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
APPENDICES
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Wide View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WIDE Softkey,
NARROW Softkey,
LEG-LEG Softkey,
CUM Softkey
Figure 5-98 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The G900X allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
Q3.FEPOT Airway
INDEX
APPENDICES
Collapsed View
Expanded View
Figure 5-99 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
278
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
EIS
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G900X displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
279
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Hold At
Wpt Menu
Selection
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
Leg Length
(TIME or DIST))
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(RIGHT or LEFT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
INDEX
Figure 5-100 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
280
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
Leg Length
(TIME or DIST))
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
AFCS
(RIGHT or LEFT)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map of Hold Location
INDEX
Expect Further Clearance Time
Activate Hold
Figure 5-101 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
282
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint Selection
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 5-102 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The system supports vertical path guidance and altitude constraints for the following leg types: AF,
CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FC, FD, PI, RF, and TF. Altitude constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EIS
The G900X system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-103 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
284
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The G900X allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
After VNV Direct-to
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VNV PROF Softkey
VNV Direct-To Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-104 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
INDEX
3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The G900X system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Displayed Text
Examples
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
Large Cyan Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
AFCS
Small Cyan Text
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Cyan Subdued
Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-105 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
286
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Cyan Text
Cyan Subdued Text
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
EIS
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
White Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as cyan text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G900X allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
EIS
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G900X displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G900X also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
INDEX
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
288
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system adds terminal procedures to the flight plan based on leg types coded within that procedure in the
navigation database. If the terminal procedure in the flight plan contains an identifier like ‘6368ft’, that indicates
a leg that terminates when the specified altitude (6368 feet) has been exceeded. A heading leg in the flight plan
displays ‘hdg’ preceding the DTK (e.g. ‘hdg 008°’). A flight plan leg requiring the pilot to manually intitiate
sequencing to the next leg displays ‘MANSEQ’ as the identifier.
Heading Leg Terminating at the
Specified Altitude
AFCS
Manually Sequenced Heading Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-106 Procedure Leg Identifiers
DEPARTURES
APPENDICES
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
INDEX
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
290
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
Departure Airport
Available Procedure Actions
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Departure Preview
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loaded Procedures
Departure Choices
Figure 5-107 Departure Selection
Selected Departure
AFCS
Loaded Departure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-108 Departure Loading
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
292
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport
Available Procedure Actions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
APPENDICES
Figure 5-109 Arrival Selection
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-110 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
APPENDICES
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
294
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPROACHES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
APPENDICES
The G900X SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, and LPV approach service
levels according to the published chart. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where LNAV+V
is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The active approach service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
(available only if minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided (downgrades to
SBAS available) LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV minima
(available only if
SBAS available)
Example on HSI
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
AFCS
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor
to the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
APPENDICES
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
296
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Available Procedure Actions
Destination Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-111 Approach Selection
Selected Approach
Loaded Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 5-112 Approach Loading
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob
to select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the
small FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The
approach is previewed on the map.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to
select the temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
298
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
AFCS
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
EIS
Press the Go-Around Button.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Course to Altitude Leg
Figure 5-113 Course to Altitude
INDEX
APPENDICES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
300
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
on the MFD, or in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for
the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the
minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation
to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-114 Temperature Compensation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
301
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 5-115 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-116 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/
INDEX
APPENDICES
deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.
302
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The G900X allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
EIS
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
- Automatic/Manual
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
AFCS
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-117 Trip Planning Page
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
APPENDICES
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA
is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to the
selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight
plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
INDEX
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
304
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL STATISTICS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
Figure 5-118 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
APPENDICES
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
INDEX
Figure 5-119 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
306
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RAIM PREDICTION Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
AFCS
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-120 RAIM Prediction
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
EIS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
AFCS
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
308
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-121 SBAS Display - Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
309
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-122 SBAS Display - Inactive
310
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G900X provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-123 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-123 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-123 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-124.
Figure 5-124 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
312
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired
flight plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-125. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is
placed immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-125 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for
V4, Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-126.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-126 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-127.
Figure 5-127 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-127, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-128.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-128 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-128.
314
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-129.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-129 List of Available Exits for V4
If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-129.
j)
Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-130.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-130 Ready to Load V4
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-131.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-131 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the
leg.
AFCS
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-132. Note the TOP
to SLN leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-132 Comfirm Active Leg
316
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-133, the magenta arrow
in the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note
the phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active.
Since a leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling
has changed to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-133 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-134.
Figure 5-134 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-135.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-135 Turn to Intercept V244
318
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-136, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-136 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-137.
Figure 5-137 HYS to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-138.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the Direct-to (
INDEX
Figure 5-138 Direct To OPSHN
320
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-139.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-139 Enter VNV Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-140.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-140 Enter VNV Offset Distance
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G900X gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives
at an altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-141, the magenta arrow indicating
the direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the
offset distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival
procedure have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered
and maintain a track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the
CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
that will be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired
altitude, then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it will be used by the
system to determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-141 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
322
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-142.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-142 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-143.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-143 List of Available Approaches
APPENDICES
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-143.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-144.
Figure 5-144 List of Available Transitions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK
is used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums (Figure 5-145)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small
FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
Figure 5-145 Barometric Minimums Set
324
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
i)
With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as
seen in Figure 5-146.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-146 Loaded Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-147. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as cyan text, indicating these values are “designated”
for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF
cannot be designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in
Figure 5-147. Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using
the WAAS GPS altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-147 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
326
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in
Figure 5-148.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS
Knob to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint
(orange box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD).
In this example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an
altitude of 10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-148 Adjusting the Descent
c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-149, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-147. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-150, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-149 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-150 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
328
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-151.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Pointer Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
Figure 5-151 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-152.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-152 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-153. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-153 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
330
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-154. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-154 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to FSHER. At a point 31 nm from the destination airport, the
phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the
HSI.
Annunciations for the upcoming turn and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight
progresses.
21) The approach may be activated at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. After FSHER, manually activate the
approach procedure:
AFCS
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-155.
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-155 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The active leg is now the course direct to HABUK iaf (see Figure 5-156).
Figure 5-156 Approach is Now Active
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is about 9,420 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope indicator, to obtain an
altitude of 8,100 feet at FALUR (Figure 5-157).
Figure 5-157 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
332
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-158) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-158 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maintain an altitude “AT OR ABOVE” 8,100 feet at CEGIX Note the altitude restriction lines under (At or Above)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-158.
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,318 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-159.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-159 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A direct-to is initiated to HUMPE. The aircraft is climbing to reach 9,000 feet at the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the TO/GA button, or the SUSP Softkey on the PFD, to resume automatic
waypoint sequencing through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INDEX
Figure 5-160 Missed Approach Active
334
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 9,000 feet at ADANE. A holding pattern is established at the
MAHP (ADANE) as shown in Figure 5-161.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-161 Establishing the Holding Pattern
27) The aircraft maintains 9,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-162.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-162 Hold Established
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G900X
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G900X detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G900X
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G900X in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G900X through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the G900X by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in amber over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-163. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in amber on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-163. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as amber text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-163.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Also, while the G900X is in DR Mode, both TAWS and Terrain Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy
of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.
336
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Distance &
Bearing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current
Track
Indicator
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Data Bar
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in amber
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation
Information
Display
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
AFCS
All GPSderived data
is amber
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-163 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Amber
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
337
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
338
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the G900X are designed to aid situational awareness and provide advisory
information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A or GDL 69/69A SXM SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
• GDL 88 Flight Information Services-Broadcast (FIS-B) Weather (Optional)
EIS
• GWX 68 Airborne Weather Radar (Optional)
• L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® Lightning Detection System (Optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (Standard with SVT Option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
• Garmin GTS 800/825 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
• Garmin GDL 88 Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) Traffic
®
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Avidyne TAS600 Series TAS (Optional)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional GDL 69/69A or GDL69/69A SXM is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. Differences
in the receiver models, where applicable, are discussed throughout this section; refer to appropriate aircraft
documentation to determine the receiver model installed in this aircraft. Received graphical weather information
and associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset
Map. The GDL 69A and GDL 69A SXM can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both
weather data and audio entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous
reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the service must be activated. Service
is activated by providing coded IDs unique to the installed receiver. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and
SiriusXM Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to
activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
AFCS
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to provide weather data and/
or entertainment programming provided through the receiver.
Establishing an account for SiriusXM services:
APPENDICES
1) Select the XM Page in the AUX Page Group.
2) Select the INFO Softkey to display the AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Note the Data Radio ID (for SiriusXM Weather) and the Audio Radio ID (for SiriusXM Satellite Radio).
4) Contact SiriusXM Customer Service using the phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
INDEX
5) Provide SiriusXM Customer Service the Audio and/or Data Radio IDs, payment information, and the desired
weather product subscription package.
340
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating the SiriusXM Weather service:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) View the list of supported Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather
product; a green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several
minutes for supported weather products in the selected subscription Service Class to become available.
4) When the available weather products displayed match the weather products offered in the selected SiriusXM
Weather product subscription Service Class, press the LOCK Softkey.
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
6) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
AFCS
Select to Display XM
Information page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather information is the Weather Data Link (XM) Page in the Map
Page Group. This is the only map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather
products.
APPENDICES
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
If the name of another weather service provider is listed in the page title (such as ‘CNXT’), proceed to the
following steps in order to change the weather data link source to display SiriusXM Weather.
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Changing the data link weather source to SiriusXM:
1) If necessary, follow the previous procedure to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Display XM Weather’ and press the ENT Key. The page title changes to
‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ to indicate SiriusXM Weather is the selected weather data link source.
The available softkeys and displayed data link weather information on the navigation maps correspond to the
selected data link weather source.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages (US
& Canada)
AFCS
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product.
The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the weather product,
which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to amber. If data for a weather product is not available (i.e., has not been received), the system displays
‘N/A’ next to the weather product symbol instead of the product age.
342
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
30
10 (Canada)
15 (69/69A)
60
30 (69/69A SXM)
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
90
12
90
12
60
12
120
12
90
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
30
5
60
12
60
12
INDEX
12
APPENDICES
60
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
12
AFCS
30
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7.5
EIS
SiriusXM Lightning
(LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage
no product image
(RADAR CVRG)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
30
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METARs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft (WIND)
AFCS
+
SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
+
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
+*
+
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
TFRs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
NEXRAD and No Radar Coverage
Navigation Map Page
EIS
SiriusXM Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
INDEX
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft Data displayed inside Profile View on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps
344
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3)
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
NEXRAD
CYCLONE SFC OFF
ECHO TOP CLD TOP XM LTNG CELL MOV
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
OFF
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Weather Product Softkeys
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM)
Page Menu
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
346
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
When a SiriusXM Weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product
information box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active SiriusXM Weather
products displayed on that page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page):
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more XM weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Echo Tops
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
348
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Severe
Thunderstorm
Warning Selected
with Map Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence,
icing data is displayed.
AFCS
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD
network provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated refresh time for the NEXRAD weather product.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For radar sites in the United States, the NEXRAD weather product shows a composite reflectivity image.
This shows the highest radar energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. For radar
sites based in Canada, the NEXRAD weather product shows radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle,
known as base reflectivity. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the intensity of the echoes
and the type of precipitation, if known.
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
AFCS
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A mosaic of data from all the available NEXRAD radar sites is shown. This data is composed of the
maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to
indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link
(XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for
display.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Reflectivity Legend
350
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in a gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
EIS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
• An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information
about storms directly over the site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Precipitation may be occurring below the lowest antenna tilt angle (0.5º), and therefore the radar beam
overshoots the precipitation. For example, at a distance of 124 miles from the radar site, the radar beam
is approximately 18,000 feet above the radar site. The radar cannot detect any precipitation occurring
below the beam at this distance and altitude.
AFCS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Block Area is 4 km2
at 30 NM map
range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
352
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed regardless of actual precipitation
type.
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Echo tops cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD or Cloud Tops are selected for display.
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend
354
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of-purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
The Cloud Tops weather product (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
EIS
NOTE: If a GDL 69/69A SXM receiver is installed, the broadcast rate for Cloud Tops is 30 minutes. As with
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
all SiriusXM Weather products, the product age becomes amber when it reaches half of the expiration time,
which is 60 minutes for Cloud Tops. Therefore, this weather product age may be amber during routine
operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
EIS
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
NOTE: The SiriusXM Lightning weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as another lightning
source (such as optional Stormscope) is displayed on the same map.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Lightning
Strikes
INDEX
Figure 6-18 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
356
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying XM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page).
To display the XM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
EIS
Figure 6-19 XM Lightning Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CELL MOVEMENT
The Cell Movement weather product (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Storm Cells
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
APPENDICES
NOTE: The Storm Cell base height is not available if a GDL 69A SXM data link receiver is installed. In this
case, the Storm Cell base height is displayed as 0 feet when the map pointer selects a storm cell.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
On most applicable maps, the Cell Movement weather product is selected for display along with NEXRAD.
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement can be selected independently.
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Cell Movement information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting Up SiriusXM Weather”).
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
EIS
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Convective
SIGMET
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
INDEX
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
358
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are enabled for display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If a GDL 69A SXM receiver installed, the SIGMET and AIRMET weather products are not available
unless at least one SIGMET or AIRMET has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no
SIGMET or AIRMET is available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
AFCS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect routine hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Selected Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24hour period, but may span a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, is displayed only in its original form.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
AFCS
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
360
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
EIS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for a specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an
off-route METAR near the waypoint is available.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-27), press the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
APPENDICES
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
INDEX
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
service area.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
AFCS
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
362
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREEZING LEVELS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Press the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-32) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
INDEX
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
364
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Winds Aloft Data Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
Altitude Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Headwind
Symbol
AFCS
5 knots
10 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
50 knots
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft information inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on
the Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-37).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
366
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COUNTY WARNINGS
The County weather product (Figure 6-38) provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS) for severe thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flood
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-38 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-39 County Warnings Legend
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-40) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and tropical
storms using the symbol shown below (Figure 6-40). Storm tracks include the predicted date and time of
arrival inside orange boxes.
Cyclone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-40 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when the Cyclone weather product
is enabled.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Legend
NOTE: If a GDL 69A SXM receiver is installed, the Cyclone weather product is not available unless at least
INDEX
one cyclone or tropical storm has been received. The weather product age indicates ‘N/A’ when no cyclone
or tropical storm has been received.
368
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-42).
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-42 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
INDEX
Figure 6-43 Icing Potential Legend
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TURBULENCE
NOTE: The Turbulence weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
product is selected for display.
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
EIS
Displaying the Turbulence weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-44 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-45), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Legend
370
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are airborne weather reports collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Routine
PIREP
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-46 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not found in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
371
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Original PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-47 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-48 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues TFRs to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs
are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement, firefighting
operations, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on
the system is only intended to supplement TFR information obtained from official sources including Flight
Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
INDEX
The system does not display the age TFR product was assembled on the ground by the data provider is not
shown; however, if TFR product is not available or has expired, the system displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left
corner of maps on which the display of TFR information is enabled.
372
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TFR Summary
Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-49 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-50 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-53).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
374
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.2 GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext Weather products varies by region. For product coverage
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
information, refer to http://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional GSR 56 Iridium satellite data link receiver provides extensive weather information to the system
through the Garmin Connext™ Weather service. The system displays graphical weather information and its
associated text on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The system provides weather information after the flight crew selects either a manual or automatic Connext
Data Request on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page on the MFD.
Garmin Connext Weather requires an active subscription to both the Iridium (satellite telephone) and Garmin
Connext Weather services.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ACCESSING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
AFCS
The primary map for viewing Garmin Connext Weather information is the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
in the Map Page Group (Figure 6-57). This is the only map display capable of showing information for all
available Garmin Connext weather products, with the exception of TAFs, which are discussed later. No weather
data is displayed until an initial Connext Weather Data Request has been completed.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. If the name of another weather data
service provider is listed in the page title (such as ‘XM’), proceed to the next step.
3) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Display Connext Weather’ and and press the ENT Key. The page title
changes to ‘Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ to indicate Garmin Connext is now the selected weather source.
REGISTERING THE IRIDIUM SATELLITE SYSTEM
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the
System ID by selecting the AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 6-54. Contact Garmin at 1-866739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135 with this information. Note the access code Garmin
provides during this process.
375
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
Figure 6-54 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REGISTERING THE SYSTEM FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
After a subscriber account has been established, the system must be registered to receive Garmin Connext
Weather data. Registration is accomplished by entering the required access code provided by Garmin. This
process is only performed when initially setting up the system for Garmin Connext Weather.
AFCS
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
MAP page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP-WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT or XM) Page. If ‘XM’ is displayed in
the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link weather source to Garmin Connext (CNXT) before
continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change the data link weather
source to Garmin Connext prior to registration.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) If the system displays the ‘CONNEXT REGISTRATION’ Window, proceed to step 7. Otherwise, press the MENU
Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 6-55.
376
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-55 Select ‘Register With Connext’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system displays the CONNEXT REGISTRATION Window as shown in Figure 6-56.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-56 Enter Access Code
6) Enter the access code provided by Garmin customer service in the ACCESS CODE field.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘REGISTER’ will now be highlighted as in Figure 6-56.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin Connext services. System registration is complete when
‘REGISTERED’ is displayed in the STATUS field.
Weather
product age
information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Precip Weather
Product Display
Enabled icon
Precip Weather
Product Selected
for Display
Figure 6-57 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
(After Connext Data Request)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When a weather product is selected for display on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, a box containing a
symbol for the product and its age (in minutes) are shown in the upper right (Figure 6-57). If weather data has
not been requested yet or is not available, ‘N/A’ is shown next to the product symbol instead of age. The age of
the weather product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and
the current GPS time. Weather products are updated continuously or refreshed at specific intervals (defined in
the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-4).
INDEX
APPENDICES
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the defined Expiration Time intervals (see Table
6-4), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. The age of the expired product is replaced
by dashes. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age changes to amber.
Table 6-4 shows the Garmin Connext weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rates. The
refresh rate represents the interval at which the Garmin Connext ground-based servers make available the most
current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which new content is received from
weather sources.
378
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext Weather products varies by region. For product coverage
information, refer to http://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/.
Symbol
Radar Precipitation
(PRECIP)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
30
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
60
Continuous
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
60
EIS
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
AFCS
* The precipitation mosaic is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take between 3
and 10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australia Bureau of Meteorology
Table 6-4 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
+
+
+
Garmin Connext Lightning (DL LTNG)
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
METARs
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page
Precipitation (PRECIP)
Navigation Map Page
EIS
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-5 shows which Garmin Connext Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on
specific maps.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+*
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
+
PIREPs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft (WIND)
* Winds Aloft data available on Navigation Map Page inside Profile View window.
Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table 6-5 Garmin Connext Weather Product Display Maps
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-58
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page). When a weather product is
selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product display is enabled.
380
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
IR SAT
DL LTNG
SIG/AIR
WIND OFF
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
PIREPS
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WIND Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PRECIP
ENGINE
Press the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-58 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Softkeys (MFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page control the map
range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The
menus also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-59).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-60).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
381
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-59 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
Figure 6-60 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
382
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If multiple data link weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-6 will result in identical settings for a comparable weather product from
another service provider.
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
FIS-B Weather Product
Precipitation
(PRECIP) and No Radar Coverage
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar Coverage
Not Available
EIS
Not Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Garmin Connext Data Link
SiriusXM Lightning
Lightning
(XM LTNG)
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather Product
and Softkey
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar
Coverage
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-6 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple Weather Data Link Sources
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-62).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-63).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
383
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-61 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-62 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-63 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page. If no weather product softkeys are selected, the LEGEND Softkey will be unavailable.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
• METARs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
INDEX
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
384
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-64 Panning on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
CONNEXT WEATHER DATA REQUESTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Connext Data Request window provides the flight crew with the options to enable or disable the requested
weather coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel
weather data requests. The status of the Connext Data Request process is also displayed.
AFCS
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all currently
available Garmin Connext weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s present position
or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field) must be part of the
request coverage area, otherwise the request status window will indicate ‘INVALID COVERAGE AREA’ and the
system will not allow a request to occur.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a flight
plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
Requesting Garmin Connext weather data manually:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-65).
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to select or deselect
one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-66, 6-67):
INDEX
• PRESENT POSITION – Requests data based on current location.
• DESTINATION – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired
flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘REMAINING FPL’ to request the remainder of the flight
plan), then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘SEND REQ’ button is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘DIAMETER / RTE WIDTH’ (diameter/route width) distance field and
turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
EIS
• WAYPOINT – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Figure 6-65 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-66 Connext Data Request Window
386
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
AFCS
Figure 6-67 Connext Data Request Results with Precipitation and Infrared Satellite Displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status box initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once a
connection is established, the Request Status Box displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with an
estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request window may be
closed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue to process
in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete depending on
the size of the selected weather coverage area and Iridium signal strength.
INDEX
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) is retained if it has not
expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data is
downloaded during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the request status window (if still open) will indicate
‘OK’.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Connext Weather Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL REQ’ and press the ENT Key. The request status box indicates
‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The pilot can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Auto requests remain enabled until the
pilot disables them, or the system power is cycled. The Request Status window will indicate a countdown timer
until the next automatic data request occurs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request window and its associated options will not be available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘UPDATE RATE’ setting. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press
the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) The ‘SEND REQ” button is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘REQUEST STATUS’ based
on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext Data
Request.
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
388
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
PRECIPITATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically, the
Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns
a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Boundary of weather
data request (shown
when Precipitation is
enabled)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Radar Coverage
within request area
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-68 Precipitation Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Airport Information Page
• AUX - Video Page
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
• PFD Inset Map
APPENDICES
Precipitation data can be displayed on the following maps:
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The system displays either base or composite NEXRAD imagery, depending on the region.
Region
Radar Reflectivity Type
United States
Composite Reflectivity
Canada, Europe, Australia
Base Reflectivity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The base reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the radar returns from the perspective of a single
antenna tilt angle. The composite reflectivity precipitation weather product shows the highest radar energy
received from multiple antenna tilt angles. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the
intensity of the echoes and the type of precipitation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation
legend (Figure 6-69), press the LEGEND Softkey when Precipitation is selected for display.
AFCS
No Radar Coverage
Boundary of Connext
weather data request
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-69 Precipitation Data Legend
APPENDICES
The display of No Radar Coverage is enabled when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line with white tick marks depicts the selected coverage area of the Connext Data
Request. This boundary encloses the precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
INDEX
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
390
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
• Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
EIS
• Base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual radar site cannot
depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over the site.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers.
• The radar beam may overshoot precipitation occuring below the radar beam, which will be undetected.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block represents
4 km2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-70 Precipitation Weather Product - Zoomed
APPENDICES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
INDEX
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INFRARED SATELLITE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When the Map Pointer is activated and panning over an area of displayed cloud tops, the system shows a
range of cloud top temperatures for the selected location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product (Figure 6-71) depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite
imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
Figure 6-71 Infrared Satellite Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the IR SAT Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Infrared Satellite legend (Figure 6-72), press the LEGEND Softkey when Infrared Satellite data
is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-72 Infrared Satellite Legend
392
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT DATA LINK LIGHTNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) weather product (Figure 6-73) shows the approximate
location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a twokilometer region. Neither cloud-to-cloud nor the exact location of the lightning strike is displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning Strikes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-73 Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning
Displaying Data Link Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the DL LTNG Softkey.
To display the Data Link Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-74), press the
LEGEND Softkey when Data Link Lightning is selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-74 Data Link Lightning Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
EIS
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is displayed as long as any portion of it is issued within the coverage area
of the Connext Data Request.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Convective
SIGMET
Figure 6-75 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
AFCS
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-76 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-77), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-76 Sample SIGMET Text
394
Figure 6-77 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud base heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an
airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and
other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
EIS
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-78 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24hour period, but may span a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, is displayed only in its original form.
APPENDICES
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
INDEX
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
Figure 6-79 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
APPENDICES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for a specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an
off-route METAR near the waypoint is available.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
396
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-80), press the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR category.
EIS
Figure 6-80 METAR Legend
WINDS ALOFT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-81) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-81 Winds Aloft at 6,000 Feet
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-82), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
Figure 6-82 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-83). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
AFCS
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-83 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-7.
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
5 knots
INDEX
10 knots
50 knots
Table 6-7 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
398
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-84).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-85).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-86).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-84 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Figure 6-86 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Weather Group
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
Text
PIREP
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-87 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AFCS
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the
original text may contain additional information not found in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT)
Page.
400
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
Original PIREP
Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-88 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-89), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs are selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-89 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
AFCS
TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data from Garmin Connext is only available in the United States
APPENDICES
(not including any U.S. territories.) Refer to http://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/
for coverage information.
INDEX
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues TFRs to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs
are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement, firefighting
operations, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on
the system is only intended to supplement TFR information obtained from official sources including Flight
Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
The system does not display the age TFR product was assembled on the ground by the data provider is not
shown; however, if TFR product is not available or has expired, the system displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left
corner of maps on which the display of TFR information is enabled.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Summary
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-90 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-91 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
402
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-92).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-94).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the request status
window.
Weather Request
Status Message
EIS
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request to
reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error [2]
Connext Comm Error [4]
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during
the previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A communications error has occurred with the GIA. The system should be serviced.
This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or the GIA or optional
GDL 59 is off-line.
Connext Comm Error [5] The Iridium or Connext networks are not accessible. Check Iridium signal strength. If this error
persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6] A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Connext Comm Error [7] A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data
request.
Connext Comm Error [8] A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
Connext Login Invalid
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in
the United States or 913-440-1135 for assistance.
Connext Server
The Garmin Connext weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to
Temporarily Inop
service in less than 30 minutes.
Connext Server Inop
The Garmin Connext weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
Invalid Coverage Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a
waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is
enabled (checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
No Connext Subscription The system is not be currently subscribed to the Garmin Connext Weather service, or the access
code is incorrect. Verify the access code. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States
or 913-440-1135 for assistance.
Reduce Request Area
The Garmin Connext weather data request area exceeds size limits. Reduce weather coverage
area and re-send data request.
Request Cancelled
The user has cancelled a Garmin Connext weather data request.
Request Failed - Try
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Again
INDEX
Table 6-8 Abnormal Garmin Connext Weather Request Status Messages
404
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD Inset Map will be available for display (see Table 6-5 for a list of weather products and their
associated map availability).
If manual weather data requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new Garmin
Connext weather data can be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic weather data
requests were enabled prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data
requests in Reversionary Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 FIS-B WEATHER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
EIS
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional GDL 88 is a Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). It receives Flight Information Services - Broadcast
(FIS-B) weather data from a network of UAT ground-based transceivers (GBTs). The system displays FIS-B
graphical weather information and associated text on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight
Display (PFD) Inset Map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FIS-B weather data reception requires the aircraft be within range and line-of-sight of an operating GBT
broadcasting FIS-B weather data. Reception may be affected by factors including altitude and terrain.
Reception of FIS-B weather data occurs automatically without any pilot action. FIS-B broadcasts provide
weather data in a repeating cycle which may take approximately ten minutes to transmit all available weather
data. Therefore, not all available weather data may be available immediately upon initial FIS-B signal acquisition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
USING FIS-B WEATHER PRODUCTS
The primary map for viewing FIS-B Weather data is the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page in the Map Page
Group.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B, XM, or CNXT) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) If the page title displays a weather data link weather source other than ‘FIS-B’, such as ‘XM’ or ‘CNXT’, proceed
to the following steps to change the data link weather source.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Display FIS-B Weather’ and press the ENT Key. The page title will display
‘MAP - WEATHER DATA LINK (FIS-B)’ to indicate FIS-B is now the selected data link weather source.
APPENDICES
On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) page, the pilot can enable/disable the FIS-B weather feature, which includes
all FIS-B weather products and related softkeys on various maps.
Enabling/disabling the FIS-B weather feature:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Enable FIS-B Weather’ or ‘Disable FIS-B Weather’, and press the ENT Key.
406
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather
Product Age
Display
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-95 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When a FIS-B weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed on the screen to the right
of the product symbol (Figure 6-95). The age of the product is based on the time difference between when
the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are transmitted at specific
intervals (defined in the Broadcast Rate column in Table 6-9).
AFCS
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time intervals (see Table 6-9), the
data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent
with FIS-B broadcast data. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
displayed changes to amber. The system displays dashes instead of a product age when a product has expired.
If a weather product is not available or has not been received, the system displays ‘N/A’ instead of a product age.
Table 6-9 shows the FIS-B weather product symbols, the expiration times, and broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which FIS-B GBTs broadcast new signals that may or may not contain new weather
data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the UAT.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FIS-B Weather Product
Symbol
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
NEXRAD Composite (US)
30
15
NEXRAD Composite (Regional)
30
2.5
90
5
90
10
90
10
60
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
No Radar Coverage
no product image
30
2.5
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
no product image
60
10
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
no product image
60
10
Table 6-9 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
METARs
+
+
+
+
+
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PIREPs
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
INDEX
Winds Aloft* (WIND)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
TFRs
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Navigation Map Page
NEXRAD
FIS-B Weather Product
Weather Information
Page
PFD Inset Map
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-10 shows which FIS-B weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
+
+
+
+
+*
+
+
+
* Winds Aloft information appears inside Profile View window on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-10 FIS-B Weather Product Display Maps
408
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure
6-96) shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page). When a weather product
is enabled for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray.
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
PIREPS
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIG/AIR
NEXRAD
US
RGNL
WIND Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
EIS
WIND OFF
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
OFF
1000
1500
2000
3000
6000
9000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
12000
15000
18000
24000
30000
34000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
45000
53000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-96 Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Weather Product Softkeys
AFCS
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing FIS-B weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-97).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-98).
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-99).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
409
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-97 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-98 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-99 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-100).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-101).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page with the changed settings.
410
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-100 Weather Data
Link (FIS-B) Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-101 Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page Setup Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Restoring default Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-101).
5) If restoring an individual weather product setting to its default value, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired field to restore.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the MENU Key.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob if needed to highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ (to restore only the highlighted field)
or ‘Restore All Defaults’ (to restore all products within the selected product group to their default settings), and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If multiple data link weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-11 will result in identical settings for all services.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SiriusXM Weather Product
and Softkey
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar
Coverage
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
FIS-B Weather Product
Precipitation
(PRECIP) and No Radar Coverage
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) and No Radar Coverage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Garmin Connext Data Link
SiriusXM Lightning
Lightning
(XM LTNG)
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
Not Available
Not Available
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-11 Weather Data Link Map Settings Shared for Multiple Weather Data Link Sources
When a FIS-B weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product information
box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
AFCS
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(FIS-B) Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active FIS-B
weather products displayed on that page.
APPENDICES
Viewing legends for displayed weather products on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
412
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more FIS-B weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Additional information about METARs, SIGMETs, AIRMETs, PIREPs, and TFRs can be selected by using the
Map Pointer to pan to the desired information on the map.
EIS
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-102 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
APPENDICES
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider to FIS-B compiles
the available individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time
to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual
images--gathered from each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
weather product age. The data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the FIS-B GBTs, which transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. NEXRAD information should never be used as a basis for
maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Figure 6-103 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data
Link (FIS-B) Page)
AFCS
The FIS-B NEXRAD weather product may be displayed for a region around the GBT (higher resolution,
updated more frequently) or for across the continental United States (lower resolution, updated less
frequently). The pilot can choose which type of NEXRAD weather product is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
APPENDICES
Displaying the NEXRAD weather product::
3) To display the regional version of the NEXRAD weather product, press the US Softkey. Softkey becomes the
RGNL Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey. This softkey becomes the US Softkey. A mosaic of NEXRAD data for the continental
United States (CONUS) is displayed.
4) To remove the NEXRAD weather product, press the RGNL Softkey. Softkey becomes the NEXRAD Softkey.
INDEX
The regional NEXRAD weather product coverage area varies, as it is determined by the data received from
ground-based sources. When the regional NEXRAD weather product is enabled, a white hashed boundary
rectangle encloses this area to indicate the geographic limits of the regional NEXRAD coverage being displayed.
The system shows composite radar data from all available NEXRAD sites inside of this boundary area.
414
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product is shown (US Softkey enabled),
the coverage boundary is not shown on the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
No Radar
Coverage
EIS
Boundary of
FIS-B Regional
NEXRAD
Product
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-104 Regional NEXRAD on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the
information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed
on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-105), press the LEGEND Softkey
when the NEXRAD weather product is enabled.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
No Radar Coverage
(Inside Coverage
Boundary)
Boundary of Regional
Radar Coverage Area
Figure 6-105 NEXRAD Weather Product Legend
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The display of no radar coverage is enabled when NEXRAD is selected for display. Areas where radar data
is not currently available, has not yet been received, or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple.
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: If the system has not received all available NEXRAD weather data (such as during initial FIS-B signal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
acquisition or in areas of marginal or poor signal reception), the system may display areas of no radar
coverage which are subsequently removed as radar data is received. It may take up to approximately ten
minutes to receive all FIS-B data, when adequate reception is available.
Reflectivity
EIS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• At a map range of 30 nm or less, individual blocks of NEXRAD weather data are viewable. For the
regional version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 1.5 nm wide by 1 nm tall. For the
continental United States version of the NEXRAD weather product, each block is 7.5 nm wide by 5 nm
wide.
• The continental US version of the NEXRAD weather product is not available above 60º of latitude.
AFCS
• Preciptiation occuring below the radar beam will not be detected.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
APPENDICES
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
INDEX
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is shown as long as any portion of it is issued within the selected coverage
area of the Connext Data Request.
416
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRMET
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMET
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-106 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-107 shows sample SIGMET text.
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-108), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-107 Sample SIGMET Text
Figure 6-108 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS AND TAFS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: The system will begin to display METAR flags as it receives reports; however it may take approximately
ten minutes for all available METAR and TAF data to be received over a FIS-B broadcast.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Aviation Routine Weather Reports or METARs typically contain current information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect routine hourly observations. An Aviation Selected Special Report or SPECI includes
the code “SPECI” in the report, and may be issued if critical information has changed after the issuance of a
METAR. The system displays colored flags at airports with report(s) available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-109 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
APPENDICES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are predications of expected weather conditions for an area within
five statute miles of the center of an airport’s runway complex. The National Weather Service issues scheduled
TAFs four times each day, and additional amended TAFs if conditions warrant. TAFs typically span a forecast
period of 24 hours, but may be scheduled for a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility,
significant weather phenomena, and sky conditions using METAR codes.
INDEX
METAR and TAF text are available on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, appears only in its original text.
418
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page, press the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
AFCS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-110 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an offroute METAR is available near the waypoint.
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
EIS
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page (Figure 6-111), press the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. The system displays a gray
METAR flag when the METAR text does not contain enough information to determine the METAR category
(e.g., VFR, IFR).
Figure 6-111 METAR Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-112) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at selected
altitudes. Winds aloft are available in various altitudes between 1,000 feet and 53,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND OFF Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the softkey for the desired altitude. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through the altitude softkeys.
The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
420
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-112 Winds Aloft at 6,000 Feet
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-113), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-113 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map
Page (Figure 6-114). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to
aircraft speed.
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Scale
Figure 6-114 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on Profile View
Headwind
Symbol
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right, as
shown in Table 6-12.
5 knots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10 knots
50 knots
APPENDICES
Table 6-12 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
Enabling/disabling profile view (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the PROFILE Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
422
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-115).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-116).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-117).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-115 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-116 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
Figure 6-117 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Weather Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
Text
PIREP
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
Figure 6-118 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
AFCS
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP text is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note
the original text may contain additional information not shown in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (FIS-B)
Page.
424
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded PIREP Text
EIS
Original PIREP
Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-119 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-120), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs are selected for
display. The PIREP color is determined by the report type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-120 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
AFCS
TFRS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
In the United States, the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs)
to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including
national security, law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued
at any time, and TFR data displayed is only intended to supplement official TFR information obtained from
Flight Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR data is not available or has expired, the system displays
‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Summary
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-121 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (FIS-B) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-122 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
426
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-123).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-124).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-125).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-123 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-125 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Aviation Group
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-124 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FIS-B WEATHER STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional information about the status of FIS-B weather products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status
Page.
Viewing FIS-B status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
Figure 6-126 Viewing FIS-B Weather Status on ADS-B Status Page
AFCS
ADS-B Status Page Item
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FIS-B Weather Status:
FIS-B Processing
INDEX
APPENDICES
Weather Products:
AIRMET
CONUS NEXRAD
METAR
METAR GRAPHICAL
NOTAM/TFR
PIREP
REGIONAL NEXRAD
SIGMET
TAF
WINDS/TEMPS ALOFT
Status
Message
ENABLED
DISABLED
---------------AVAILABLE
Description
The FIS-B weather feature is enabled to process and display FIS-B weather
products.
The FIS-B weather feature is disabled.
No data received from the GDL 88 UAT.
FIS-B weather data is available for display for the weather product.
NOT AVAILABLE FIS-B weather data is not available for the weather product, and/or the system is
not receiving the FIS-B weather service.
AWAITING DATA The system is receiving the FIS-B weather service, and is waiting to receive the
weather product from the FIS-B data broadcast.
Table 6-13 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for FIS-B Weather
428
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Lightning information from data link services such as SiriusXM Weather or Garmin Connext cannot
EIS
be displayed at the same time as on-board lightning detection system data is selected for display.
The following pages can display on-board lightning detection system data:
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Video Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display lightning data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages, press
the MAP Softkey, then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the
lightning strike symbols shown in Table 6-14.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Table 6-14 Lightning Age and Symbols
SETTING UP LIGHTNING DETECTION ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting up lightning detection options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-127), press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’
(Figure 6-128), and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-129).
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The following options are available (Figure 6-128):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of lightning detection data on or off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. The system removes Stormscope
information when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-127 Navigation Map Page Menu
INDEX
Figure 6-128 Map Setup Menu
430
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-129). The system identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stormscope
Display
Enabled Icon
Figure 6-129 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
APPENDICES
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Manually clearing lightning detection data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-130).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-130 Navigation Map Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lightning detection information can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the
Navigation Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of the lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, the system removes lightning detection information from the map,
although lightning may still be present.
AFCS
Selecting a lightning detection range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
432
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
3) To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-131 Stormscope Page
AFCS
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
APPENDICES
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
INDEX
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope Page.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
EIS
Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards.
It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse
Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust,
and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice alerts. It only
provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from
the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated
algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
AFCS
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
APPENDICES
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
INDEX
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-132 and Table 6-15 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
434
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
On the Terrain Proxmity Page only, a gray shade of purple indicates no terrain data is
available.
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-132 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red obstacle is above or within 100’
below current aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100’ and
1000’ below current aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
Table 6-15 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
• AUX - Video Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Inset Map
AFCS
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
APPENDICES
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-136).
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-133).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-134).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-135).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-133 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-134 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
436
Figure 6-135 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
EIS
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-136 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
AFCS
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for showing terrain and obstacle data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information (airports, VORs, and
other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Map Orientation
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Current Aircraft GPSderived GSL Altitude
Map Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-137 Terrain Proximity Page (360 View)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Arc
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-138 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
438
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TERRAIN-SVS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system option. If the TAWS-B
option is also installed, it will take precedence over Terrain-SVS.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is information is not displayed if the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database
coverage area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system integrated with the optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
system. Terrain-SVS provides visual and auditory alerting to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or
obstacles relevant to the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding SVT, refer to the Additional
Features section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with the optional Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified.
Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to
assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles and provides additional alerting capabilities.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
AFCS
• Descent to 500 Feet Callout (DFC)
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
APPENDICES
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to GSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
EIS
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-139 and Table 6-16 and Table 6-17 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
Potential Impact Point
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Unlighted Obstacle
1000 ft
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
On the Terrain-SVS Page only, a gray shade of purple indicates no terrain data is
available.
Figure 6-139 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
AFCS
Red obstacle is above or within 100’ below
current aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow obstacle is between 100’ and 1000’
below current aircraft altitude
APPENDICES
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft below
aircraft altitude
Table 6-16 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
INDEX
Warning
Caution
Table 6-17 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
440
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Terrain-SVS Page
• AUX - Video Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
EIS
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, an icon to indicate the feature is
enabled for display and a legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-146).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the Terrain-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-140).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-141).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-142).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
441
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-140 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-141 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-142 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
AFCS
The Map - Terrain-SVS Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information
(airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight
path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the
Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.
Changing the Terrain-SVS Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
442
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-143 Terrain-SVS Page
Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
INDEX
Figure 6-144 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, the system provides visual annunciations and voice alerts. Table 6-18 shows Terrain-SVS alert types
with corresponding annunciations and voice messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TerrainSVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVS Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
Pop-up
Alert
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-145 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-146 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
444
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Type
Voice Alert
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-18 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the projected flight path
as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The
system issues visual annunciations and voice alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or
obstacles.
AFCS
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
EIS
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
700
600
500
400
300
200
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-147 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot manually inhibit FLTA alerts. Discretion should be used when inhibiting FLTA alerts. When
Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited, the system displays the ‘TER INH’ annunciation on the PFD and in the MFD
terrain annunciation window.
AFCS
Figure 6-148 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
2) Select the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain’ or ‘Enable Terrain’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
While Terrain-SVS alerting is manually inhibited (or the Terrain-SVS system is not available or has failed),
the system may display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GPS SBAS approach.
INDEX
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix.
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
446
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, the Terrain-SVS system conducts a test of its alerting capabilities. The system issues a voice
alert when the test has completed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
System Status
Audio/Voice Alert
System Test in Progress
None
System Test Pass
None
“Terrain System Test Passed”
“Terrain System Failure”
EIS
Terrain System Test Fail
Table 6-19 Terrain-SVS System Test Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
Terrain-SVS Page
Annunciation
Voice Alert
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when GPS
position is available
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when
sufficient GPS signal is received
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when aircraft
re-enters database coverage area.
AFCS
Out of database coverage
area
None
INDEX
None
APPENDICES
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable
or invalid. Terrain-SVS
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, invalid
software configuration, audio
fault
No GPS position
PFD/
MFD Alert
Annunciation
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Cause
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity returns and the and the aircraft is within
the database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
Table 6-20 Terrain-SVS Abnormal Annunciations
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.7 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
EIS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed if the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage area.
situational awareness.
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational
awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed
alerts and warnings are advisory in nature only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification. TAWS-B requires the following to operate
properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
448
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as
the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-149 and Tables 6-21 and 6-22 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
Potential Impact Point
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Unlighted Obstacle
EIS
1000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
On the TAWS-B Page only, a gray shade of purple indicates no terrain data is available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-149 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100’ below
current aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100’ and 1000’
below current aircraft altitude
AFCS
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft below
aircraft altitude
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-21 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Example Annunciation
APPENDICES
Warning
Caution
Table 6-22 TAWS-B Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• TAWS-B Page
• AUX - Video Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
EIS
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-156).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-150).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-151).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-152).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
450
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-150 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-151 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-152 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B PAGE
The Map - TAWS-B Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point
data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information
(airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight
path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the
TAWS-B Page.
AFCS
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
APPENDICES
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
INDEX
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Range Rings
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-153 TAWS-B Page (360 View)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Annunciation Window
Figure 6-154 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
452
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, the system displays visual annunciations with voice alerts. Table 6-23 shows TAWS-B alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
Alert Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-155 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
Pop-up
Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 6-156 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
or
*
EIS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
*
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
APPENDICES
*
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout (VCO)
“500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
*
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-23 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
454
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-157 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
500
Figure 6-157 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues visual and voice alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-158. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-158.
455
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Required
Terrain
Clearance (FT) (FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-158 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-159).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft
is either 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 nm of the
threshold.
AFCS
800
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
INDEX
Figure 6-159 PDA Alerting Threshold
456
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The pilot can manually inhibit PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts. Discretion should
be used when inhibiting TAWS-B alerts, and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When the
TAWS-B system is manually inhibited, the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD
(Figure 6-160).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-160 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled
(TAWS-B Inhibited) Annunciation
EIS
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-B (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
While TAWS-B alerting is manually inhibited (or the TAWS-B system is not available or has failed), the
system may display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GPS SBAS approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix.
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
AFCS
The purpose of the voice alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft
descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain
as determined using the GSL altitude and terrain database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
APPENDICES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
INDEX
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figures 6-161 and 6-162 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b based on Altitude
Loss and Sink Rate respectively.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1000
900
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-161 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
900
AFCS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-162 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
458
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
System Condition
PFD/MFD Alert TAWS-B Page
Annunciation Annunciation
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test Passed”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
EIS
TAWS System Test Fail
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a system test of its alerting capabilities. The system test can also be
manually initiated. A voice alert occurs when the test concludes. TAWS-B system testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Table 6-24 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-163).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-163 TAWS-B Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The voice alert “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity is restored and the aircraft is within the database
coverage area, the voice alert “TAWS Available” is generated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Cause
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid. TAWS
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid on all
displays, invalid software
configuration, TAWS audio fault
No GPS position
PFD/MFD
Annunciation
None
TAWS-B Page Annunciation
Voice Alert
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when GPS
position returns.
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when sufficient
GPS signal is received.
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when aircraft
enters database coverage area.
Excessively degraded GPS signal
None
Out of database coverage area
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-25 TAWS-B Abnormal Conditions
460
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.8 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution or warning
annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The colors and
symbols in Figure 6-164 and Table 6-26 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
EIS
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
1000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-164 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
Table 6-26 Profile View Obstacle Colors and Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling/Disabling Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Terrain on the Profile View
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
EIS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the Profile View
is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain will
be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the applicable Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVS, or
TAWS-B discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
Profile View
Path
Navigation Map Range
AFCS
Terrain Legend
Terrain Enabled Icons
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Scale
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
APPENDICES
Figure 6-165 Navigation Map Page with Profile View and Terrain Enabled
INDEX
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for unusually tall obstacles), a vertical line
appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL, as shown
in Figure 6-166.
462
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-166 Profile View with Tall Obstacles
EIS
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Total Profile View Width
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Phase
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View (Table 6-27) is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated
on the HSI. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about flight phases.
Table 6-27 Profile View Width Scale
AFCS
PROFILE PATH
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown
as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-165) and is only available when Profile View is
enabled. White range markers appearing on both edges of the Profile Path rectangle match the range markers
along the distance scale inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or
7.5 km if configured for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-167).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-168).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-169).
EIS
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum map range at which the Profile
Path is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-167 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-169 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-168 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
464
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.9 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
EIS
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS), Traffic Alert
and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS), and to TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown
without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: TIS is disabled if another traffic system is installed.
TIS Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every five seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below
to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed using the symbology shown in Table 6-28.
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
AFCS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-28 TIS Traffic Symbols
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA) indicates that the current track of the intruder could result in a collision. When traffic
meets the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid amber circle symbol appears on the display. A TA which is detected,
but is outside the range of the navigation map, is indicated with a banner message in the lower left corner of the
map and a half TA symbol at the relative bearing of the intruder on the Traffic Map Page or Traffic Inset Map.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-174), the Traffic Inset Map, or in a banner at the lower left corner of navigation maps
with the traffic overlay enabled (Figure 6-170).
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal page for viewing traffic information. Additional displays of traffic
information are available as map overlays while TIS is operating, and serve as additional reference to the Traffic
Map Page. Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Inset Map
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page (optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Trip Planning Page
Displaying traffic information (MFD navigation maps):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Status
Banners
Traffic Display
Enabled
INDEX
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-170 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
466
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
EIS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-171).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-172).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-173).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum map range at which traffic symbols are shown
AFCS
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum map range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
467
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-171 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-172 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-173 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal page for viewing TIS data. Aircraft
orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
Controlling the display of traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
APPENDICES
3) Select the desired TIS Mode:
Press the OPERATE Softkey to display traffic, or press the STANDBY Softkey to remove traffic and place the
traffic system into Standby Mode.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
468
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing
“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending
EIS
Range
Marking
Rings
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-174 Traffic Map Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level
TIS ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashes for five
seconds, and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
AFCS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
469
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-175 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system issues a “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is
out of range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
AFCS
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the traffic map displays.
Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. ‘TNA MUTE ON’ appears in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
470
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
EIS
DATA FAILED
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
The transponder has failed*
TIS is unavailable or out of range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
UNAVAILABLE
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 6-29 TIS Failure Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System Test
has Failed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data Not
Received from
Transponder
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-176 TIS Power-up Test Failure
APPENDICES
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
471
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TIS Operating
OPERATING
TIS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
* See Table 6-31 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-30 TIS Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a TIS mode:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey. The mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key. The
annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner
of maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-31).
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
AFCS
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AGE MM:SS
TRFC COAST
APPENDICES
TRFC RMVD
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic data has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
INDEX
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-31 TIS Traffic Status Banner Annunciations
472
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.10 GARMIN TAS TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Garmin GTS 800/825 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). The system enhances flight crew
situational awareness by displaying traffic information for detected transponder-equipped aircraft. The system
also provides visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to assist the pilot in visually acquiring traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The traffic system is capable of tracking a total of 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A, C, or S
transponders. The system can display a maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential simultaneously.
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the system is in Operating Mode, the traffic unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft
while monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing,
and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range.
AFCS
The system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and voice alerting is
provided.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRAFFIC SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
APPENDICES
The traffic system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under ideal conditions, the
GTS 800 detects transponder traffic up to 12 nm in the forward direction; the GTS 825 detects transponder
traffic up to 22 miles in the forward direction. TAS range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own
aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. The system displays TAS-detected traffic using
the symbology shown in Table 6-32.
In addition, if a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is installed, and the GTS 800/825 detects airborne
traffic providing 1090 MHz Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) information, the system
will display the TAS traffic using the ADS-B symbology shown in Table 6-33.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Do not confuse this functionality with full ADS-B capability, which can provide traffic information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and ADS-B traffic outside of the TAS surveillance volume.
This system is limited to displaying ADS-B information from suitably equipped airborne aircraft within the
TAS surveillance volume.
TAS Symbol
Description
EIS
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-32 TAS Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
AFCS
Traffic with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy
is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Table 6-33 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as an amber circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
APPENDICES
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
INDEX
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for all other traffic
beyond 6 nm that is neither a TA or PA.
474
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol indicates traffic is climbing or descending at least
500 feet per minute with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
EIS
Figure 6-177 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, this is displayed as a vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track.
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-178 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The traffic system automatically suppresses the display of on-ground aircraft equipped with Mode S
transponders.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. Level A (less) TA sensitivity is used when the aircraft’s
groundspeed is below 120 knots or when the flaps are down. In all other conditions while the traffic system
is providing surveillance, Level B (greater) TA sensitivity is used to assess TA threats.
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-34 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
476
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Voice traffic alerts do not occur when the flaps are down. Only visual traffic annunciations are issued
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
under this condition.
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
EIS
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing, relative
altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-35). The announcement
“Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own
altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-179).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined (Figures 6-181 and 6-184), an amber text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA
symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the
TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-179 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
APPENDICES
Bearing
INDEX
Table 6-35 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not provided during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
test during flight.
EIS
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
approximately ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is
displayed on the Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-180). If the system test passes, the system announces “TAS System
Test Passed”, otherwise the system announces “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete,
the unit enters Standby Mode.
Testing the Traffic System:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern display as shown in the figure below.
4) Press the TEST Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Test Mode
Annunciation
AFCS
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level
Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing
Figure 6-180 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
478
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OPERATION
NOTE: The traffic unit automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
takeoff. The unit also automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after
landing.
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The traffic unit must be in Operating Mode for traffic
to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
EIS
Pressing the OPERATE Softkey allows the system to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Pressing the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key. The traffic system switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-181) shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no
valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick up to 12 mn, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory
with ADS-B
Directional
Information,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Traffic Display
Range
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
6000’ Above,
Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 0.9
nm, 500’ Above,
Climbing
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity Traffic
with ADS-B
Directional
Information,
900’ Above,
Descending,
Flight ID
Displayed
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-181 Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
Mode field.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
480
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Display
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. If the
system issues a TA occurring outside of this airspace, it will always be shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
EIS
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, press the BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see Softkey description in previous step 2):
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
•
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight ID Display
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-182). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight ID
Figure 6-182 Traffic Map Page with Flight IDs Enabled
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
AFCS
On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state)
(Figure 6-183).
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key.
Figure 6-183 Traffic Map Page Menu
482
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick
2) The following range options are available:
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm (GTS 825 only)
•
24 and 40 nm (GTS 825 only)
EIS
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
• Trip Planning Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information is also
available on the following other MFD maps and pages as an additional reference to the Traffic Map Page:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Active Flight Plan Page
• AUX - Video Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system
option is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
AFCS
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When traffic is selected on navigation maps, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic is enabled for display
(Figure 6-184).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map:
1) Ensure the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in Figure 6-184.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
483
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Traffic
TA Off Scale
Banner
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-184 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-185).
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-186).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-187).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
APPENDICES
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
484
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-185 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-186 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-187 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
A traffic inset map may be displayed on the PFD. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation,
topographic and optional weather data on the PFD inset navigation map
AFCS
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode
TAS System Test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating
OPERATING
TAS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-37 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-36 TAS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-37 TAS Failure Annunciations
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
APPENDICES
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
INDEX
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-38 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
486
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.11 GARMIN GDL 88 ADS-B TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The optional Garmin GDL 88 is a dual-link Universal Access Transceiver (UAT). It sends and receives
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) traffic information on the 978 MHz UAT frequency. It
also receives data link weather information on the UAT frequency. As a dual-link transceiver, the GDL 88 also
receives ADS-B traffic information with its 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES) receiver. The system provides
visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to help the pilot visually acquire potentially conflicting traffic. This
discussion covers the traffic features of the GDL 88; refer to the Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B)
Weather discussion for more information about the UAT data link weather features of the GDL 88.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADS-B SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADS-B is a core technology in the FAA NextGen air traffic control system and is comprised of three segments:
ADS-B (Broadcast), ADS-R (Rebroadcast), and Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADS-B is the automatic broadcast of position reports by aircraft, surface vehicles, and transmitters on fixed
objects. These broadcasts contain information such as GPS position, identity (Flight ID, Call Sign, Tail Number,
ICAO registration number, etc.), ground track, ground speed, pressure altitude, and emergency status.
AFCS
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1090 ES
18,000 FT
10,000 FT
RADAR
ATC
UAT
UAT
UAT
APPENDICES
Mode A/C
1090 ES
ADS-B
Ground
Station
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 6-188 ADS-B System
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three classifications of aircraft or
system capability: ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive
ADS-B information. ADS-B Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating
refers to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either ADS-In, ADS-B Out,
or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
AUTOMATIC DEPENDENT SURVEILLANCE-REBROADCAST (ADS-R)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Because it is not required that ADS-B In capable aircraft be able to receive ADS-B data on both the 1090
MHz and 978 MHz data links, a method exists to get data from one data link to the other. ADS-R is the
rebroadcast of ADS-B data by FAA ground stations, which provide this service by taking data from one link
and rebroadcasting it on the other link. For example, two aircraft are in the service volume for a ground
station, and one is transmitting on 1090 MHz and the other on 978 MHz, the ground station retransmits the
data from each aircraft on the other link to ensure the two aircraft can “see” each other.
Figure 6-189 ADS-R Operation - FAA Illustration
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The GDL 88 is capable of receiving ADS-B traffic reports directly on the 1090 MHz ES data link in addition
to the 978 MHz UAT data link. This allows the GDL 88 to receive ADS-B position reports on both frequencies
from aircraft in the vicinity, without relying on ADS-R ground station coverage.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE-BROADCAST (TIS-B)
APPENDICES
TIS-B provides the bridge between the radar-based ATC system and the ADS-B-based system. When an
ADS-B In or Out capable aircraft is within the service volume of an FAA ADS-B ground station, the ground
station broadcasts a portion of the ATC radar data to the aircraft. This aircraft is then included in the list of
aircraft being provided TIS-B service and is then considered a “TIS-B participant.”
INDEX
TIS-B coverage is available when the aircraft is within ground station coverage, in Secondary Surveillance
Radar coverage, and the other aircraft is also in Secondary Surveillance Radar coverage, and is transmitting
its altitude.
488
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The ground station provides ATC radar information for other aircraft within ±3,500 feet and 15 NM of the
participant, to include altitude, position, ground speed, and ground track. TIS-B broadcasts occur once every
three to thirteen seconds, depending on the characteristics of the ground station providing the TIS-B service.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table describes the aircraft that are observed by a GDL 88-equipped aircraft according to the
level of equipment installed in the other aircraft.
EIS
Other Aircraft Equipment
Viewable by GDL 88 UAT Equipped Aircraft
1090ES Out Equipped
Yes
UAT Receive Only Capable
No
UAT Transmit Equipped
Yes
No Transponder, No ADS-B
No
Non ADS-B Equipped, but with Mode C or S Transponder
Yes*
* Only when in ADS-B ground station coverage and when the other aircraft is in ATC radar coverage.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-39 Aircraft Available for Viewing by an ADS-B Equipped Own Aircraft
ADS-B WITH TAS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is also installed and operating with the UAT, the UAT
receives traffic from the active traffic system and attempts to match (or “correlate”) this traffic with ADS-B
traffic the UAT is tracking. When a correlation is made, only the traffic with the most accurate information
is displayed to the flight crew. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but not the
other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This correlation of traffic by the UAT improves the accuracy of the
traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of the same aircraft being displayed twice.
NOTE: When operating on the edges of ATC radar coverage or when using an optional active traffic system
providing intromittent traffic data, a single aircraft may be briefly or periodically depicted as two aircraft on
the display.
AFCS
Either the TAS or the UAT can issue a traffic alert. If both systems determine an alert is necessary, and
the traffic is correlated, only the TAS-generated alert is issued. If traffic is not correlated, and both systems
determine an alert is necessary, the TAS-generated alert occurs first, followed by the UAT-generated alert.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CONFLICT SITUATIONAL AWARENESS & ALERTING
Conflict Situational Awareness (CSA) is an alerting algorithm which provides ADS-B traffic alerting similar to
the TAS systems discussed previously.
APPENDICES
The UAT issues a voice alert when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is displayed, for example “Traffic! Two O’clock,
Low, Two Miles.”
The own aircraft altitude above terrain determines the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm to minimize nuisance
alerts. Radar Altitude (if available), Height Above Terrain, and Geodetic Sea Level (GSL) altitude are used to
adjust the sensitivity of the CSA algorithm in accordance with the following table:
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
489
Sensitivity
Level
Radar
Altitude
(Feet)
Height Above
Terrain (HAT)
GPS Phase
of Flight
Own Altitude
(Feet)
4
Up to 1000
(RA or HAT)
Any
Any
4
4
Unavailable
Unavailable
Any
Unavailable
5
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Any
Approach
Any
Any
20
20
850
850
0.20
0.20
Any
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Any
Any
25
850
0.20
Terminal
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Any
<=5000
25
30
850
850
0.20
0.35
>5000
<=10,000
40
850
0.55
>10,000
<=20,000
45
850
0.80
>20,000
<=42,000
48
850
1.10
> 42,000
48
1200
1.10
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
7
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
8
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
9
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
10
Unavailable or
>2350
Unavailable or
>2350
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
6
>1000
<=2350
Unavailable
Unavailable or
>2350
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
Vertical
Threshold
for Alert
(feet)
850
Protected
Volume
(NM)
Any
Lookahead
time
(sec)
20
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
Not approach
and not
Terminal
(including
unavailable)
0.20
INDEX
Table 6-40 CSA Alerting Thresholds for ADS-B Traffic
490
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the system detects a new Traffic Advisory (TA), the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-41). For example,
the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own
aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-190).
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
EIS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, an amber text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate ‘TA’
followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer a factor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AFCS
Figure 6-190 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
Approximate Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Zero miles”, “Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Bearing
APPENDICES
Table 6-41 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
NOTE: ADS-B traffic voice alerts are suppressed when below 500 feet.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AIRBORNE AND SURFACE APPLICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The UAT can help the pilot visually acquire traffic both in the air and on-the-ground. There are two ADS-B
applications or modes: Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situational Awareness (SURF). The
system automatically selects the appropriate application based on conditions.
The AIRB application is on when the aircraft is more than five nautical miles and 1,500 feet above the nearest
airport. When the AIRB application is active, the system only displays traffic which is airborne.
EIS
The SURF application is on when the aircraft is within five nautical miles of the nearest airport and less than
1,500 feet above field elevation. When the SURF applications is on, the system displays airborne and on the
ground traffic. At a Traffic Map Page range of two nautical miles or less, the airport environment (including
taxiways and runways) appears in addition to traffic. The airport displays are derived from the SafeTaxi database.
Refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SafeTaxi displays.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Do not rely on the solely on the traffic display to determine the runway alignment of traffic, especially
when runways are in close proximity to each other.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B, all traffic targets may not be
depicted on the traffic display. Because higher data precision is required for display in the SURF environment,
some traffic eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is on. Individual eligibility for AIRB and SURF
is depicted on the AUX-ADS-B Status Page, discussed later in this section.
Aircraft traffic is on
the ground
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SURF Application
On
APPENDICES
Ground Vehicles
INDEX
Figure 6-191 Traffic Map Page with SURF Mode On
492
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in Table 6-42. Above or below the traffic symbol is the
traffic identifier, and altitude. A small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic is
climbing or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute, otherwise no arrow appears.
Description
Traffic Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Traffic Advisory without directional information.
EIS
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range ring at proper bearing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory without directional information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-threat traffic with directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic without directional information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic located on the ground with directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track. Ground traffic is only
displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the ground.
Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own
aircraft is on the ground.
Non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when ADS-B is in Surface (SURF) Mode or own aircraft is on the
ground.
AFCS
Table 6-42 ADS-B Traffic Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Map
range is adjustable with the Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
EIS
Airborne
Application On
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory
with Directional
Information
200’ Above,
Descending
Non-Threat
Traffic with
Directional
Information
10000’ Below,
Climbing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Proximity
Advisory with
Directional
Information,
500’ Above,
Level
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
AFCS
Figure 6-192 Traffic Map Page
Enabling/disabling the display of ADS-B traffic.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the ADS-B Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘ADS-B On’ or ‘ADS-B Off’.
APPENDICES
b) Press the ENT Key.
Testing the display of ADS-B traffic:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
2) If necessary, turn the Joystick to select a map range of 2 and 6 nm to ensure full test pattern display.
3) Ensure the ADS-B Softkey is disabled.
494
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) If an optional TAS is installed, ensure the TAS STBY Softkey is enabled.
5) Press the TEST Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Test Mode’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
A test pattern of traffic symbols appears during the test, and a ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears on the PFDs.
At the conclusion of the test, the system issues the voice alert “Traffic System Test”. If the test pattern is
displayed and the voice alert is heard, the system has passed the test.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-193 Traffic Map Page with Test Mode Enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
APPENDICES
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
INDEX
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
•
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
3) Press the ENT Key.
DISPLAYING MOTION VECTORS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic symbols depict the
traffic’s reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors
extending from the traffic symbols display how the traffic is moving relative to own aircraft. These vectors
are calculated using the traffic’s track and ground speed and own aircraft’s track and ground speed. These two
values are combined to depict where the traffic is moving purely with respect to own aircraft, and provide a
forecast of where the traffic will be, relative to own aircraft, in the near future.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Absolute Motion
Vectors
Figure 6-194 Traffic Map Page with Absolute Motion Vectors Enabled
496
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling the Motion Vector display:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the MOTION Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press one of the following softkeys:
•
ABS:
Displays the motion vector pointing in the absolute direction.
•
REL:
Displays the motion vector relative to own aircraft
•
OFF:
Disables the display of the motion vector.
EIS
Or:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight ‘Relative Motion’, ‘Absolute Motion’ or ‘Motion Vector Off’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Relative Motion
Vectors
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-195 Traffic Map Page with Relative Motion Vectors Enabled
APPENDICES
Adjusting the duration for the Motion Vector projected time:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the MOTION Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the DURATION Softkey.
4) Press a softkey for the desired duration (30 SEC, 1 MIN, 2 MIN, 5 MIN).
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
5) When finished, press the BACK Softkey to return to the Traffic Map Page.
Flight ID Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-196). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight ID
Figure 6-196 Traffic Map Page with Flight IDs Enabled
AFCS
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Additional Traffic Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
The Traffic Map Page can display additional information for a selected aircraft symbol. This may include
the aircraft tail number/Flight ID, type of aircraft (e.g., glider, small/medium/large aircraft, service vehicle,
unmanned airborne vehicle (UAV)), course, track, groundspeed), and other information.
498
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing additional traffic information:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob. A cyan bracket highlights the first selected traffic symbol. Additional information appears
in a window in the upper-right corner of the Traffic Map Page.
3) To select a different aircraft symbol, turn the FMS Knob to move the cyan bracket until the selected aircraft
traffic symbol is highlighted.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob again to remove the cyan selection bracket.
EIS
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the range of the traffic map, or counter-clockwise to decrease the range.
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• Nearest Pages
• Trip Planning Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Navigation Map Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
AFCS
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Figure 6-197).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
APPENDICES
1) Ensure the traffic system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in Figure 6-197.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
499
Proximity Advisory
without Directional
Information
Traffic Advisory
with Directional
Information
Non-Threat Traffic
with Directional
Information
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory
with Directional
Information
TA Off Scale
Banner
Traffic Overlay
Enabled Icon
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-197 ADS-B Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-198).
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-199).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-200).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
APPENDICES
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
500
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-198 Navigation Map
Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-199 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-200 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional data link weather information.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Maps)
Traffic Map Center Banner
Annunciation
ADS-B System Test
Initiated
ADS-B: TEST
TEST MODE
ADS-B Operating in
Airborne Mode
ADS-B: AIRB
ADS-B: AIRB
ADS-B Operating in
Surface Mode
ADS-B: SURF
ADS-B: SURF
ABD-B Operating
without own
aircraft directional
information
ADS-B: NO TRK/HDG
none
ABD-B Traffic Off
ADS-B: OFF
ADS-B TRFC OFF
ADS-B Traffic Not
Available
ADS-B: N/A
ADS-B TRFC N/A
ADS-B Failed*
ADS-B: FAIL
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Navigation Maps)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
* See Table 6-44 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-43 Traffic Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
Data is being received from the traffic unit, but the
DATA FAILED
unit is self-reporting a failure
ADS-B TRFC FAIL
Incorrect data format received from the traffic unit
APPENDICES
Table 6-44 Traffic Failure Annunciations
INDEX
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
502
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
Traffic unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the traffic unit
EIS
TRFC FAIL
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TA OFF SCALE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-45 Traffic Status Annunciations
Additional information about the status of ADS-B traffic products is available on the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Viewing ADS-B Traffic Status:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - ADS-B Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-201 ADS-B Traffic Status on ADS-B Status Page
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADS-B Status Page
Item
Traffic Application
Status: AIRBORNE
(AIRB), SURFACE
(SURF), AIRBORNE
ALERTS (CSA)
Status Message
Description
ON
Traffic application is currently on. Required input data is available, and it meets
performance requirements.
Traffic application is not currently active, but application is ready to run when
condition(s) determine the application should be active. Required input data is
available, and it meets performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is available, but it does
not meet performance requirements.
Traffic application is not available. Required input data is not available or the
application has failed.
Traffic application is not available, because it has not been configured. If this
annunciation persists, the system should be serviced.
Traffic application status is invalid or unknown.
The system is receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
The system is not receiving the ADS-R coverage from an FAA ground station.
ADS-R coverage is invalid or unknown.
The GDL 88 is using the #1 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GDL 88 is using the #2 GPS receiver for the GPS position source.
The GPS source is invalid or unknown.
Displays the number of minutes since the last uplink from a ground station
occurred. If no uplink has been received, or the status is invalid, dashes appear
instead of a number of minutes.
AVAILABLE TO RUN
NOT AVAILABLE
EIS
FAULT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOT CONFIGURED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TIS-B/ADS-R Coverage
GPS Status: GPS
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Uplink Status:
Last uplink
---------------AVAILABLE
NOT AVAILABLE
--------------External #1
External #2
--------Number of minutes, or
‘------’
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-46 AUX-ADS-B Status Page Messages for ADS-B Traffic
504
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.12 AVIDYNE TAS600 SERIES TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for a detailed discussion about the
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
traffic system.
The optional TAS600 Series Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of
other aircraft. TAS uses an on-board interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-toair traffic data link.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAS SYMBOLOGY
Traffic is displayed with the symbols shown below.
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAS Symbol
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AFCS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-47 TAS Symbol Description
APPENDICES
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond five nm.
A Proximity Advisory (PA) indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within a five nm
range, but is still not considered a threat.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A TA that is beyond the selected display map range is indicated on the
traffic map by a half TA symbol at the edge of the traffic map at the relative bearing of the intruder.
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic information is displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page (optional)
• Trip Planning Page
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system
option is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Traffic Display
Range
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
AFCS
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-202 Traffic Map Page
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
INDEX
The traffic system mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page
506
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Advisory
Proximity
Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-203 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
AFCS
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
APPENDICES
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
Changing the altitude display mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following softkeys:
INDEX
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
•
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
APPENDICES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-204).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-205).
508
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-206).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
EIS
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-204 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-205 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-206 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for information on alerts generated
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
by the TAS equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• The traffic system generates a voice alert.
EIS
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-207 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
AFCS
TAS VOICE ALERTS
To listen to an update of Traffic Advisories press the MUTE Softkey twice.
Muting the TAS voice alert in progress:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Press the MUTE Softkey while the voice alert is playing. Subsequent voice alerts will be heard.
510
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for information on the operating
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
mode.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
OPERATING
TAS Operating
FAIL
TAS Failed*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* See Table 6-49 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-48 TAS Modes
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DATA FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FAILED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Table 6-49 TAS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TRFC FAIL
INDEX
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display
range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic
Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
APPENDICES
TA X.X ± XX ↕
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA OFF SCALE
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-50 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
511
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
512
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The G900X is capable of interfacing with the following third party Automatic Flight Control Systems (AFCS):
• TruTrak DigiFlight-II-series
• TruTrak ADI
• TruTrak Sorcerer
• TruTrak Pictorial Pilot
• Trio Avionics EZ Pilot
• TruTrak DFC-series
• TruTrak Digitrak
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• S-TEC System Fifty Five X
Refer to the installed autopilot manual for operational instructions.
EIS
7.1 GFC 7X (LANCAIR EVOLUTION ONLY)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The approved Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) always supersedes the information in this
Pilot’s Guide.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the flight director. Any
IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
The GFC 7X is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the G900X System
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram (Figure 1-1) to support this
system description.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GFC 7X AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within the primary (#1) IAU. Flight director
commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
AFCS
– Pitch/roll mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servo and provides servo
monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, AHRS attitude and
rate information, and airspeed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, vertical acceleration, and airspeed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric trim capability when the
autopilot is not engaged.
514
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.2 AFCS CONTROLS
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezel of the MFD:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP Key
FD Key
3
9
4
10
AFCS
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
EIS
Engages/disengages the autopilot
2
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing
again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot
is engaged, the key is disabled.
3 NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4 ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
5 VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
6 FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7 YD Key
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
8 HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
9 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
10 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
11 NOSE UP/NOSE Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes
DN Keys
1
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
6
Figure 7-1 Dedicated MFD AFCS Controls (GDU 1045)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The following AFCS controls are located in the cockpit separately from the MFD:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot and interrupts pitch trim operation
This switch may be used to mute the aural autopilot disconnect alert.
The AP DISC Switch is located on each control stick.
EIS
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot
CWS Button
(Control Wheel Steering) is engaged and synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the
current aircraft pitch (if not in Glideslope Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold
Mode)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new
reference points, depending on the current pitch and roll modes. CWS
operation details are discussed in the flight director modes section.
The CWS Button is located on the top of the left control stick.
GA Button (Go Around)
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed
approach when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation
source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located near the throttle handle.
Used to command manual electric trim (MET)
The AP TRIM Switch is located on the left control stick.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AP TRIM Switch
(Autopilot Trim)
516
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.3 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director activated, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°/+20°) and roll (22°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
Modes Selected
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
Heading Select
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
AFCS
Navigation**
GA Button
ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Key
FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS STATUS BOX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Autopilot
status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left
and vertical on the right. Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green.
EIS
Lateral Modes
Armed
Active
Yaw
Autopilot Damper
Status
Status
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS Status Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command
Bars
AFCS
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
518
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COMMAND BARS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed on the PFD as a single magenta cue. The
Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands. The Command Bars do not override the aircraft symbol.
If the attitude information sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars are
removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if either pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
Command Bars
EIS
Aircraft Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-3 Command Bars
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
AFCS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-4 Loss of VOR Signal
APPENDICES
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 AFCS MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AFCS is cabable of operating in a variety of independent Lateral Modes, Vertical Modes and Combonation
of both the Lateral and Vertical Modes.
VERTICAL MODES (PIT, ALT, VS, FLC)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes that do not operate in conjuntion with a Lateral Mode with their corresponding
controls and annunciations. The mode reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude
Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes. The NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys can be used to change
the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode.
Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values for each of these references using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN
Keys are also listed in the table.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Mode
Vertical Speed
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Flight Level Change
Description
Control Annunciation
Reference
Range
Holds aircraft pitch attitude; may
be used to climb/descend to the (default)
PIT
-15° to +20°
Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
*
ALTS
Holds current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
Holds aircraft vertical speed; may
nnnn
-3000 to
be used to climb/descend to the
VS Key VS
fpm
+1500 fpm
Selected Altitude
Holds aircraft airspeed while
aircraft is climbing/descending to FLC Key FLC nnn kt 90 to 180 kt
the Selected Altitude
Reference
Change
Increment
0.5°
100 fpm
1 kt
AFCS
* ALTS is armed automatically when Selected Altitude is to be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
520
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active pitch mode by the green annunciation ‘PIT’. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode
is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to
the nose-up/down limit.
EIS
Changing the Pitch Reference
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of the VNV Target
Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for
example). The ALT Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the
green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation.
The Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active pitch mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the Selected Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Use of the ALT Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
522
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode
(see Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the
altitude error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude
Reference.
EIS
Changing the Altitude Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight
director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the
CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Vertical
Speed
Reference
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
APPENDICES
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
INDEX
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
524
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the Airspeed Reference
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys
Flight Level
Change Mode
Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to a new airspeed, then releasing the CWS Button to
establish the new Airspeed Reference
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
INDEX
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-3 lists the lateral modes that do not operate in conjunction with a Vertical Mode with their
corresponding controls and annunciations.
Lateral Mode
Description
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the
HDG
Selected Heading
Key
EIS
Roll Hold
Heading Select
Navigation, GPS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Annunciation
Navigation, VOR/LOC Enroute Capture/
Track
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS,
VOR, LOC)
NAV
Key
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
ROL
25º
HDG
25º
GPS
25º
25º Capture
10º Track
VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
modes. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
AFCS
When the flight director is activated, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated as
‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed
in Table 7-4.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-10 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
APPENDICES
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
INDEX
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
526
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains the
Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
CHANGING THE SELECTED HEADING
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
Heading Select
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Heading
Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Heading
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Track Selected Heading
Figure 7-11 Heading Select Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where glideslope capture is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.
Figure 7-12 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
INDEX
APPENDICES
• During a LOC/ILS approach the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
528
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Navigation Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Indicate Left Turn
to Track GPS Course and Climb
to Intercept Selected Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Backcourse
Mode Active
Selected
Course
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 7-13 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
INDEX
LOC2 is Selected
Navigation Source
Figure 7-14 Backcourse Mode
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMBINATION MODES (GA, VNV, APR, NAV, BC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-4 lists the modes that operating by using both Vertical and Lateral Modes with their corresponding
controls and annunciations.
NOTE: The GFC 7X limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
EIS
Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Path Tracking
VNV Target Altitude Capture
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Glidepath***
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Glideslope
Description
Control
Captures and tracks descent
legs of an active vertical VNV Key
profile
Captures
the
Vertical
Navigation (VNV) Target
*
Altitude
Captures and tracks the
WAAS glidepath on approach
APR Key
Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach
Navigation, GPS **
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/
Track **
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source NAV Key
(GPS, VOR, LOC)
Backcourse Capture/Track
Captures
and
tracks
a localizer signal for
backcourse approaches
Annunciation
ALTV
GP
GS
FMS
VOR
LOC
BC Key
BC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically
armed)
APPENDICES
Go Around
FMS
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source APR Key
(GPS, VOR, LOC)
Disengages the autopilot
and commands a constant
pitch angle and wings level
in the air
Reference
Range
VPATH
Approach, GPS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Maximum
Roll
Command
Limit
VAPP
GA
Switch
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
GA
Wings Level
10°
* ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of the Selected Altitude.
INDEX
** The Heading, Navigation GPS and Navigation VOR mode maximum roll command limit will be limited to the Low Bank
mode value if it is engaged.
***GP is available in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when SBAS is available. Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
Table 7-5 Flight Director Combination Modes
530
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GO AROUND MODE (GA)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pushing the GA Switch engages the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution
of a missed approach or a go around. This mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as ‘GA’
in both the active pitch and roll mode fields. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and arms Selected
Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the
aircraft attitude (i.e., with the CWS Button or NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys) result in reversion to Pitch and Roll
Hold modes.
Go Around Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-15 Go Around Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or dead reckoning mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
NOTE: If another pitch mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable,
the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
Figure 7-16 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
532
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within 5 minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and
the descent is not captured.
EIS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude Below
VNV Target
VNV Target
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 7-17 Vertical Path Capture
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as appropriate.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
(RVSI)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-18 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the Altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
534
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
EIS
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.
Figure 7-19 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
535
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1
minute” is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed
once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
AFCS
Altitude Reference (In
This Case, Equal To
VNV Altitude Target)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-20 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
APPENDICES
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
INDEX
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude
capture mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude,
depending on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
536
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
APPROACH MODES (VAPP, GPS/GP, LOC/GS, BC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
EIS
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when
the CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the
active lateral mode). If the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key
is pressed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath (GP) Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode without Vertical Guidance:
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
AFCS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR or NAV Key.
The Flight Director will then supply Lateral Guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-21 GPS Approach Mode Armed
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (SBAS ONLY)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
EIS
Glidepath Mode is available only in installations with GIA 63W IAUs when SBAS is available. Glidepath
Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated in
white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting GPS Approach with Vertical Guidance:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the APR Key.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
AFCS
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-22 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF)
• Vertical deviation is valid
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
538
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
Figure 7-23 Glidepath Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Glidepath
Indicator
Selecting LOC Only Navigation Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the NAV Key.
AFCS
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
APPENDICES
Selecting LOC Backcourse Mode (BC)
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
INDEX
3) Set the Selected Course to the localizer front course
4) Press the BC Key.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
EIS
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-24 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency
Tuned
INDEX
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-25 Glideslope Mode
540
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
Glideslope
Indicator
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing the Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Selected Course is controlled using the CRS Knob (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode). Pressing the
CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Approach Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button is
released.
Intercepting and Flying a DME Arc
EIS
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides
vectors to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not
automatically intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS
Navigation Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the
beginning of the arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects
GPS Navigation Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the AFM for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
The autopilot and yaw damper operate flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo. The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns.
EIS
FLIGHT CONTROL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos, based on the active flight director modes. Servo motor
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to
certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND PITCH TRIM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight
director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and
provides this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average
pitch servo effort.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric trim.
This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch rather than the trim wheel. Manual trim
commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated simultaneously. Trim
speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
ROLL AXIS
AFCS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director
maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
YAW AXIS
INDEX
APPENDICES
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot engagement.
542
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director are activated (if not already
engaged). The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold modes when initially activated. When the YD
Key is pressed, the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged).
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
EIS
Autopilot
Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-26 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. CWS activity has no effect on yaw damper engagement. The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily
replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to the flight
director modes section for CWS behavior in each mode.
Control Wheel Steering
AFCS
Figure 7-27 CWS Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
543
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Switch, GA Button, AP TRIM ARM Switch, or
the AP Key on the MFD. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation
and a two-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural
alert may be cancelled by pushing the AP TRIM ARM or AP DISC Switch (AP DISC Switch also cancels the
flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
EIS
The YD Key or AP DISC Switch can be used to disengage the yaw damper. The ‘YD’ annunciation turns
yellow and flashes for five seconds upon disengagement.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and by the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or AP TRIM ARM Switch.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
• Stall Warning
Figure 7-29 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
AFCS
Automatic yaw damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by a failure in a
parameter also affecting the yaw damper. This means that the yaw damper can remain operational in some
cases where the autopilot automatically disengages. The yaw damper also disengages upon a localized failure
in the yaw damper system.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot Disengagement
544
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.6 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
33
30
3
30
27
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27
30
24
24
21
27
24
27
15
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
9
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
15
6
KCOS
KMKC
30
6
3
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
33
0
33
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
12
21
15
18
Figure 7-31 Flight Plan Overview
AFCS
DEPARTURE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff, set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet using the ALT Knob.
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
APPENDICES
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
INDEX
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/NOSE
DN Keys or pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed Reference.
b) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb using Vertical Speed Mode.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
HD
GM
od
e
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
AFCS
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
KMKC
1
2
VS
e
Mod
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-32 Departure
546
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
EIS
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to 255°. Note that at this point, the flight director is still in
Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly 290°.
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
33
3
Hd
29 g
0
V4
6
AFCS
30
o
27
3
255
9
o
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
24
VO
R
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
1
APPENDICES
21
18
Figure 7-33 Intercepting a VOR Radial
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
547
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EIS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
0
33
3
30
0
3
V4
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
33
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
o
24
15
21
18
12
15
21
18
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
2
12
24
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
AFCS
27
076
1
9
o
260
e
d
AV Mo
VOR N
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-34 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
548
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for the descent:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the Airspeed
Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed automatically.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the NOSE UP/NOSE DN Keys or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the
commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level
Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
APPENDICES
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 7-35 FLC Descent
549
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
b) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
550
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALT Mode
TOD
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
VPT
HM
ode
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
3 nm
OPSHN
EIS
Figure 7-36 VPTH Descent
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
551
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
EIS
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
AFCS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
552
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VP
TH
M
od
e
ALT Mode
1
FL
C
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pla
nn
M
od
e
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
3
ed
De
sce
nt
Pa
th
ALT Mode
TOD
4
VP
TH
Mo
5
BOD
ALT Mode
EIS
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
de
Selected Altitude
OPSHN
HABUK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3 nm
Figure 7-37 Non-path Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
AFCS
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
APPENDICES
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
2
HD
G
M
od
e
EIS
PYNON
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
Figure 7-38 ILS Approach to KCOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Refer to the AFM to determine whether SBAS functionality is approved. Support for SBAS precision
approaches is available only in installations with GIA 63Ws when SBAS is available.
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
AFCS
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
APPENDICES
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
INDEX
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the Decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
554
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HABUK
FALUR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
555
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
1
PYNON
EIS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
KCOS
4
2
Figure 7-39 LPV Approach to KCOS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EIS
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision Height and apply go around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
Note that when the GA Button is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flashes 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
AFCS
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
556
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
EIS
MOGAL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
557
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
GA Mode
KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
3
2
1
Figure 7-40 Go Around/Missed Approach
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.7 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-41 AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition
Aileron Mistrim Right
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure
AFCS
(or Stuck AP TRIM
Switch)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yaw Damper Failure
Description
Roll servo providing sustained force in indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move AP TRIM switches separately to unstick
YD control failure
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative
System Failure
APPENDICES
Annunciation
Preflight Test
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight
system tests. Doing so may cause the preflight system test to fail or never
to start. Cycle power to the servos if this occurs.
INDEX
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Table 7-6 AFCS Status Alerts
558
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in Altitude Hold, Glideslope or Glidepath Modes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director and pitch commands are limited for overspeed protection.
Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode
reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-42 Overspeed Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
559
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Blank Page
560
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the G900X include the following:
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
EIS
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Satellite telephone and SMS messaging services
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Bluetooth® Management using a Flight Stream 210 (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Scheduler
• Flight Data Logging
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features
on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as
the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
AFCS
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AOPA and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such
as available services, hours of operation, and lodging options. Either the AOPA or AC-U-KWIK database may be
installed, but not both simultaneously.
Satellite telephone and SMS messaging service is available with an optional subscription service.
APPENDICES
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver offers
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The optional Flight Stream 210 device provides a Bluetooth® connection between the G900 and a mobile device
running the Garmin Pilot™ application. GPS, AHRS, ADS-B, and FIS-B weather data can then be shared with the
mobile device. Also, flight plans can be transferred from the mobile device to the G900X.
INDEX
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
maintenance phase checks or other events in the Messages Window on the PFD.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
561
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: SVT requires a terrain database that has a resolution of nine arc-seconds.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G900X Integrated Flight Deck.
SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑101). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) or standard Terrain-SVT is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVT or TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
562
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch ladder increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
563
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
EIS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVT:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
564
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airport
Runway
Pathways
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and navigation
source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to
the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive
leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the Inset map or
MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
565
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Programmed
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
566
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
567
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
568
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Zero Pitch
Line
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Color of
Pathways
match the
CDI color
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
APPENDICES
ZERO PITCH LINE
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
569
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in
the Inset map or MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the
SVT display. For more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
570
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are outlined in white. Other runways will be
outlined in gray. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be
outlined with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft
gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Other
Runway
on Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Selected for
Approach
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Runways
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
571
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN-SVT AND TAWS ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
572
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
TERRAIN
Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
573
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Displaying field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
574
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVT View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
575
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
576
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
Aircraft
Position
EIS
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport
Features
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
577
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SAFETAXI
Option
INDEX
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
578
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
SafeTaxi Database
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
AFCS
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
579
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 12S1, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–12 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–12 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
INDEX
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
580
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
581
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-20) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Off-Scale
Areas
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
INDEX
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
• Approaches
582
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
SHW CHRT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
ALL
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
583
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-22 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner
584
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
585
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G900X softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑29). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the DeKalb Peachtree (KPDK) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
586
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Bravo on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information: the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
587
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-27, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-28).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page
588
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page
589
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
WX Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-32. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
590
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
591
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-21).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Complete
Chart
Shown
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View
592
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart Plan
View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
593
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
594
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
595
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
INDEX
Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
596
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-42 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
597
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G900X softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑44).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
598
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
599
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView Database
Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
600
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is shown.
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1203, is deciphered as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
12 – Indicates the year 2012
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–12 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The DISABLES date 28–APR–12 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
601
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-48. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
602
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 FLITECHARTS
• Departure Procedures (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are
displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available
from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart
and advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
WX
APR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
GO BACK
AFCS
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-49 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
603
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-50 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-51 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-52 Unable To Display Chart Banner
604
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-53 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
605
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G900X softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
INDEX
Figure 8-54 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
606
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-54) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-55) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or
INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte,
NC airport has three additional charts offering information: the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and
Take-off Minimums.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Info Box
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-55 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
607
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-55, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-56).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-57 Departure Information Page
608
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-58 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 8-59 Approach Information Page
609
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM WX Satellite Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G900X softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Info Available
on This Airport
AFCS
WX Info
When
Available
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
APPENDICES
Figure 8-60 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
WX Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
610
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-49).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-61 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
611
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-62 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
612
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
AFCS
Figure 8-63 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
613
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-64 Page Menus
614
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G900X softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑66).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
615
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-66 Approach Information Page, Day View
INDEX
Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Night View
616
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts are disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
Figure 8-68 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-69. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
617
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
EIS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1202, is deciphered as follows:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
12 – Indicates the year 2012
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–12 is the first date that this database is current.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–12 is the last date that this database is current.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–12 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
INDEX
FliteCharts
Data
Figure 8-69 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
618
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is Before Effective Date
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
619
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-71.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
EIS
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) If necessary, select the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-71 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
620
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Directory Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-72 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-73.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
621
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
12 – Indicates the year 2012
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 12D1, is deciphered as follows:
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–12 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–12 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Directory
Data
Figure 8-73 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
622
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 SATELLITE TELEPHONE SERVICES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides airborne Iridium Satellite Telephone and SMS Messaging service.
Iridium telephone and text meassaging are available to the flight crew through the MFD, audio panel, and headset.
Operation of these features is accomplished through the AUX-AUXILIARY COMMUNICATIONS Pages.
REGISTERING THE SYSTEM
EIS
A subscriber account must be established for each Iridium transceiver prior to using the Iridium Satellite System
for telephone services. Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver
(GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 8-74. Contact Garmin
Flight Data Services at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-74 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
APPENDICES
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network as well as to or from the telephone
handset in the cabin, when installed. Calls can also be answered or made from the cabin phone, however, only
actions initiated from the cockpit phone will be discussed here. See the cabin handset user guide for more
information. Control and monitoring of telephone functions are accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE
Page.
To view the Telephone Page:
INDEX
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX-TELEPHONE Page.
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
623
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PHONE STATUS display, as shown in Figure 8-75, gives a graphical representation of the current disposition
of voice and/or data transmissions. Table 8-5 describes symbology used on PHONE STATUS display.
Satellite
Signal
Strength
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
External
Phone
Figure 8-75 Phone Status Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENABLE/DISABLE THE IRIDIUM TELEPHONE SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Iridium Satellite Telephone System may be turned on or off by using the page menu.
Figure 8-76 Enable Iridium Telephone System
To enable the Iridium telephone system:
APPENDICES
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Enable Iridium Transmission’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
To disable the Iridium telephone system:
INDEX
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
624
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
External
Phone
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Internal
Phone
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
EIS
Phone dialed is busy
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone is dialing another phone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone is disabled
Phone is reserved for data transmission
AFCS
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
APPENDICES
Table 8-5 Telephone Symbols
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
625
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INCOMING CALLS
NOTE: Outside callers should dial 00 + 8816 or 8817 + aircraft phone number when calling the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Iridium Telephone System.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TELEPHONE Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure 8-77 will
be displayed. If the call is from the cabin, CABIN will be displayed as seen in this figure. If the incoming call
is an Iridium network call, IRIDIUM will be displayed. In addition to the pop-up alert, a voice alert, “Incoming
Call”, will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Incoming Call Pop-up
Incoming Call Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-77 Incoming Call
To answer an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ANSWER Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Selecting
the TEL Softkey will display the AUX-TELEPHONE allowing additional call information to be viewed before
answering.
APPENDICES
To mute incoming call alerts:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mute Incoming Call Alerts’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received. The
mute condition is annunciated on the Telephone Page as shown in Figure 8-78.
626
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to an external phone through the Iridium Satellite Network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
selecting the ANSWER Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
To make a call:
1) Press the TEL Key on the audio panel.
EIS
2) Press the DIAL Softkey on the MFD. A display similar to Figure 8-78 will be shown.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the TEL Key on the audio panel.
b) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
c) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Dial a Phone Call’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
d) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-78 Initiating a Call
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3) Enter the desired number string (typically, country code + area code + phone number) by selecting the number
softkeys on the MFD, pressing the numeric keys on the PFD/MFD Controller, or turning the FMS Knobs. The
system may be configured by an authorized repair facility to automatically enter a default country code when
the dialing window is displayed. To replace the default country code, move the cursor to the first (furthest left)
number in the dialing window and enter the desired country code.
627
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-79.
Figure 8-79 Make the Call
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number, as in Figure 8-80.
INDEX
Figure 8-80 System is Making the Connection
628
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the phone is answered, the connection is established as shown in Figure 8-81. To exit the call, press
the HANGUP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-81 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
629
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the SATELLITE PHONE.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) If necessary, press the SMS Softkey to display the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page as shown in Figure 8-82.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-82 Text Messaging Page
630
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Symbol
Description
Received text message that has not been opened
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Received text message that has been opened
Saved text message, draft not sent
EIS
System is sending text message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Predefined text message
Table 8-6 Text Message Symbols
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure
8-83 will be displayed when a new text message is received.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
APPENDICES
Figure 8-83 New Text Message Received
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Press the VIEW Softkey to view the message (Figure 8-84). Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish
the pop-up window and leave the text message unopened. Selecting the IGNR ALL Softkey will extinguish
the pop-window and ignore all future incoming text messages. Selecting the SMS Softkey will display the
AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
631
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-84 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
Figure 8-85 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
632
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
190-00726-00 Rev. L
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Replying to a text message:
While viewing the text message, press the REPLY Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key.
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Text messages may be sent from the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the NEW Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00726-00 Rev. L
Garmin G900X Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 8-86 Composing a New Text Message
633
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered f